HEATH KIT
MANUAL
HEATH COMPANY ' BENTON HARBOR, MICHIGAN
USE EXTREME CARE DURING INITIAL TESTING
AND ALL SUBSEQUENT OPERATION OF THIS
TRANSCEIVER. WHILE THE HW-IOI IS DESIGNED
FOR MAXIMUM SAFETY, NEVER LOSE RESPECT
FOR THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRESENT IN THIS UNIT.
PROTECT YOURSELF ALWAYS AGAINST LETHAL
OR SEVERE ELECTRIC SHOCK.
HEATH COMPANY
HEATH COMPANY PHONE DIRECTORY
The following telephone numbers are direct lines to the departments listed:
Kit orders and delivery information (616) 982-3411
Credit (616) 982-3561
Replacement Parts (616) 982-3571
Technical Assistance Phone Numbers
8:00 A M. to 12 P.M. and 1:00 P.M. to 4:30 P.M., EST, Weekdays Only
R/C, Audio, and Electronic Organs (616) 982-3310
Amateur Radio (616) 982-3296
Test Equipment, Weather Instruments and
Home Clocks (616) 982-3315
Television (616) 982-3307
Aircraft, Marine, Security, Scanners, Automotive,
Appliances and General Products (616) 982-3496
Computers (616) 982-3309
Consumer Protection Plan for Heathkit Consumer Products
Welcome to the Heath family. We believe you will enjoy assembling your kit and wiH be pleased with its
performance. Please read this Consumer Protection Plan carefully. It is a ‘LIMITED WARRANTY*’ as
defined in the U S. Consumer Product Warranty and Federal Trade Commission Improvement Act. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
Heath’s Responsibility
PARTS — Replacements for factory defective parts will be supplied free for 90 days from date of purchase. Replacement parts are
warranted for the remaining portion of the original warranty period. You can obtain warranty parts direct from Heath Company by writing
or telephoning us at (616) 962*3571 . And we will pay shipping charges to get those parts to you . . . anywhere in the world.
SERVICE LABOR — For a period of 90 days from the date of purchase, any malfunction caused by defective parts or error in design wil
be corrected at no charge to you. You must deliver the unit at your expense to the Heath factory, any Heathkit Electronic Center (units of
Veritechnoiogy Electronics Corporation), or any of our authorized overseas distributors.
TECHNICAL CONSULTATION — You wiH receive free consultation on any problem you might encounter in the assembly or use of your
Heathkit product. Just drop us a line or give us a caH. Sorry, we cannot accept collect calls.
NOT COVERED — The correction of assembly errors, adjustments, calibration, and damage due to misuse, abuse, or negligence are
not covered by the warranty. Use of corrosive solder and/or the unauthorized modification of the product or of any furnished component
wiH void this warranty in its entirety. This warranty does not include reimbursement for inconvenience, loss of use, customer assembly,
set-up time, or unauthorized service.
This warranty covers only Heath products and is not extended to other equipment or components that a customer uses in conjunction with
our products.
SUCH REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF THE CUSTOMER AND THERE SHALL BE NO LIABILITY
ON THE PART OF HEATH FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY LOSS OF BUSINESS OR PROFITS. WHETHER OR NOT FORSEEABLE.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not
apply to you.
Owner’s Responsibility
EFFECTIVE WARRANTY DATE — Warranty begins on the date of first consumer purchase. You must supply a copy of your proof of
purchase when you request warranty service or parts.
ASSEMBLY — Before seeking warranty service, you should complete the assembly by carefully following the manual instructions.
Heathkit service agencies cannot complete assembly and adjustments that are customer's responsibility.
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT — Performance malfunctions involving other non Heath accessory equipment, (antennas, audio compo-
nents, computer peripherals and software, etc.) are not covered by this warranty and are the owner's responsibility.
SHIPPING UNITS — Follow the packing instructions published in the assembly manuals. Damage due to inadequate packing cannot be
repaired under warranty.
If you are not satisfied with our service (warranty or otherwise) or our products, write directly to our Director of
Customer Service, Heath Company. Benton Harbor Ml 49022. He wilt make certain your problems receive
immediate, personal attention.
Heathkit® Manual
for the
SSB TRANSCEIVER
Model HW-101
595 - 1277-18
HEATH COMPANY
BENTON HARBOR, MICHIGAN 49022
Copyright © 1970
Heath Company
All Rights Reserved
Printed in the United States of America
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 2
INTRODUCTION 3
PARTS PACKAGING 4
CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY 5
Switch Boards
Parts List #1 6
Step-by-Step Assembly 8
PRELIMINARY CHECKS 105
COIL COVER AND TUBE INSTALLATION Ill
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
HP-13 Series Power Supply Connections 112
HP/PS-23 Series Power Supply Connections 114
Modulator Circuit Board
Parts List #2 12
Step-by-Step Assembly 14
IF Circuit Board
Parts List #3 17
Step-by-Step Assembly 18
Bandpass Circuit Board
Parts List #4 20
Step-by-Step Assembly 21
Audio Circuit Board
Parts List #5 24
Step-by-Step Assembly 25
RF Driver Circuit Board
Parts List #6 28
Step-by-Step Assembly 29
VFO
Parts List #7 31
Step-by-Step Assembly 32
Chassis Photo. . .{fold-out from page) 34
CHASSIS
Parts List #8 44
Step-by-Step Assembly
Parts Mounting 48
Harness Wiring 58
Chassis Bottom-Components and Wiring . . 64
Coaxial Cable Wiring 68
Component Mounting-Chassis Bottom ... 70
Wiring RF Section-Chassis Top 75
Mounting Parts-Front Panel 79
Front Panel Wiring 80
Front Panel Mounting 84
Wiring-Chassis Top 85
Final Wiring-Chassis Bottom 90
Knob Installation 99
MICROPHONE CONNECTIONS 115
INITIAL TEST 117
ALIGNMENT 119
Receiver Alignment 120
Transmitter Alignment 122
Crystal Calibrator Alignment 124
Dial Calibration 125
CABINET INSTALLATION 127
INSTALLATION
Fixed Station Installation 131
Mobile Installation 134
OPERATION
Reading the Meter 139
Receiver Section 140
Transmitter Section 140
Mobile Operation 143
IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY 144
Troubleshooting Chart 146
VFO Troubleshooting 1 54
SPECIFICATIONS 157
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 161
Transmitter Circuits 162
Receiver Circuits 175
Metering Circuits 180
CHASSIS PHOTOGRAPHS 182
CONTROL AND CONNECTOR FUNCTIONS CIRCUIT BOARD X-RAY VIEWS 186
Front Panel Functions 101
Right Side Control Functions 103 SCHEMATIC . . .(fold-out from page)
Top Chassis Control Functions 103
Rear Apron Connections 104
191
INTRODUCTION
The Heathkit Model HW-101 SSB Transceiver transmits and
receives SSB (single sideband) and CW (continuous wave)
signals on the 80 through 10 meter amateur bands. It may
also be used as an exciter for a linear amplifier, and it has an
ALC (automatic level control) input for use in this service.
The Heathkit ac power supply is available for fixed station
use, and the Heathkit dc power supply and mobile mounting
bracket may be used for mobile operation.
The Transceiver is furnished with a crystal filter for SSB use.
A narrow CW crystal filter, available as an optional
accessory, may be mounted in the Transceiver and switched
from the front panel for convenient change of operating
mode.
Provisions are made for both VOX (voice-operated transmit)
and PTT (push-to-talk) operation. An anti-trip circuit
prevents a signal received over the speaker from feeding back
to the microphone and switching the transmitter on during
VOX operation. The crystal-controlled heterodyne oscillator
assures accurate, stable operation.
The dial mechanism has a large tuning knob which operates
smoothly and provides convenient, backlash-free tuning. A
built-in crystal calibrator allows the dial to be accurately
calibrated at 100 kHz intervals. Other features include
TALC (triple action level control) to prevent overdriving
the final amplifiers, and tone-actuated CW operation. The
panel meter operates as an S meter on receive, and reads
ALC voltage on transmit. The same meter can be switched
manually to read either relative power output or final
amplifier cathode current.
A total of twenty tubes and nineteen semiconductors is
used. The VFO uses a field-effect transistor as the oscillator.
The use of circuit boards and a wiring harness provides a
clean, compact chassis layout and greatly simplifies kit
assembly. The use of Switch- Boards* (circuit boards which
have band switch wafers mounted on them) eliminates much
of the intricate wiring to the band switch.
Refer to the “Kit Builders Guide " for information on tools,
wiring, soldering , resistors, and capacitors.
HEATHKIT R
3
PARTS PACKAGING
The Transceiver parts are packed in the large shipping
carton, which contains smaller packages and other parts.
Some of these smaller packages have numbers on them. The
number on each of these packages corresponds to the
number on one of the following seven parts lists.
After the seven numbered packages have been removed from
the large carton, the remaining parts are pack #8. Pack #8
consists mainly of items too large to fit into the small
packages, and those items used in the chassis assembly
sections.
You will be directed to open each of these packages as they
are needed. Each of the assembly sections of the Manual
contains its own parts list and step-by-step instructions. At
the beginning of each parts list you will be told which
numbered package to open. You will also be directed to
remove the parts from pack #8 that are required to
complete that assembly section.
NOTE: To avoid intermixing parts, do not open any of the
parts packs until directed to do so at the beginning of one of
the parts lists. Any part that is packed in an individual
envelope with a part number on it should be placed back in
its envelope after it is identified until that part is called for
in a step.
To order replacement parts, refer to the “Replacement Parts
Price List" and use the Parts Order Form furnished with this
kit.
HEATHKIT*'
4
CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY
This section of the Manual contains separate parts lists and
step-by-step assembly instructions for circuit boards.
Before starting to assemble this kit, read the “Kit Builders
Guide” for information on wiring, soldering, resistors, and
capacitors.
Use 1 /2-watt resistors unless directed otherwise in a step.
Resistors will be called out by the color code and the
resistance value in £2 (ohms), k£2 (kilohms), or Mf2
(megohms). Capacitors will be called out by the capacitance
value and type.
Before you install a disc capacitor, remove from its leads any
excess body coating material which protrudes through the
circuit board and would prevent soldering the leads to the
foil.
Be especially careful not to cover unused holes with solder
or bridge solder between foils during the assembly of the
circuit boards.
In some instances, resistors will be mounted vertically.
Position each circuit board and all parts as shown in the
Pictorials. Follow the instructions carefully, and read the
entire step before performing the operation.
A number of coils will be installed on Switch-Boards. It is
IMPORTANT that each coil base lies flat against the board.
Identify each circuit board by its part number. This number
is listed in the upper left-hand corner of the page at the
beginning of the assembly steps, and is printed on the
component side of each circuit board. Position the boards
foil side down as shown in the Pictorials. When a circuit
board is finished, set it aside until it is called for later in the
assembly instructions.
HSATHKIT
5
Page 6
SWITCH-BOARDS
In this section you will assemble the following circuit
boards: crystal, heterodyne oscillator, driver grid, and driver
plate.
PARTS LIST #1
KEY PART
No. No.
PARTS
Per Kit
Open parts pack #1 and check each part against the
following parts list. The key numbers correspond to the
numbers in the Parts Pictorial. For pricing information, refer
to the separate "Heath Parts Price List."
DESCRIPTION
PARTS PICTORIAL
RESISTORS (1 /2-Watt) (T)
1 6-101 1 100 H (brown-black-brown)
6-102 1 1000 fi (brown-black-red)
6-223 1 22 kO (red-red-orange)
CAPACITORS
Mica
2 20-130
1
12 pF
20-77
1
24 pF
20-96
4
36 pF
20-97
1
50 pF
20-102
1
100 pF
20-105
2
180 pF
20-107
2
680 pF
Disc
3 21-140
1
.001 juF
21-16
2
.01 ju F
COILS AND CHOKES
NOTE: The appearance of the mounting base and terminals
on several of the following coils may vary from those shown
on the Parts Pictorial.
4 40-686
2
7 MHz (yellow dot), L702, 802
5 40-687
4
14/21 MHz (green dot), L703,
40-693
1
704, 803, 804
28 MHz (brown dot), L605
40-688
2
29 MHz (black dot), L705, 805
40-692
1
29.5 MHz (blue dot), L608
6 40-685
2
3.5 MHz (gray dot), L701, 801
7 40-689
1
3.5/7 MHz (red dot), L601/602
40-690
1
14/21 MHz (orange dot).
40-691
1
L603/604
28.5/29 MHz (violet dot).
L606/607
15 juH RF choke
8 45-51
1
Page 7
KEY PART
PARTS
DESCRIPTION
No. No.
Per Kit
SWITCHES
9 63-396
2
Rotary wafer (red dot)
63-397
2
Rotary wafer (yellow dot)
WIRE-SLEEVING
340-2
1
Small bare wire
340-3
1
Large bare wire
343-15
1
Coaxial cable
344-21
1
Large red hookup wire
344-50
1
Black hookup wire
344-51
1
Brown hookup wire
344-52
1
Red hookup wire
344-53
1
Orange hookup wire
344-59
1
White hookup wire
346-1
1
Small black sleeving
346-2
2
Clear sleeving
346-5
1
Large black sleeving
CRYSTALS
10 404-207
1
12.395 MHz
404-208
1
15.895 MHz
404-209
1
22.895 MHz
404-210
1
29.895 MHz
404-21 1
1
36.895 MHz
404-212
1
37.395 MHz
404-213
1
37.895 MHz
404-214
1
38.395 MHz
SWITCH-BOARDS
85-132-1
1
Crystal
85-133-1
1
Heterodyne oscillator
85-133-2
1
Driver grid
85-133-3
1
Driver plate
MISCELLANEOUS
390-147
1
"Danger High Voltage” label
390-186
1
Number sheet
1
Blue and white identification
label
1 1 490-1
1
Alignment tool
12 490-5
1
Nut starter
597-260
1
Parts Order Form
597-308
1
Kit Builders Guide
1
Manual (See Page 1 for
part number.)
Solder
PARTS PICTORIAL
©
STEP-BY-STEP ASSEMBLY
CRYSTAL SWITCH-BOARD
START
CONTINUE
O
FINISH
HETERODYNE OSCILLATOR
SWITCH-BOARD
START
Position the heterodyne oscillator
Switch-Board (#85-133-1) as shown.
( ) 100 ft (brown-black-brown).
( ) .001 /i F disc.
( ) Solder the resistor and capacitor leads
to the foil and cut off the excess lead
lengths.
NOTE: When installing the coils in the fol-
lowing steps, align the coil form with the coil
outline on the board, and position the color
dot on the coil over the color dot on the
Switch- Board. Then hold the coil base flat |
against the board and solder the coil pins. DO
NOT cut off the pins after soldering. j
( ) Coil #40-693 (brown color dot).
) Coil #40-692 (blue color dot).
( ) 100 pF mica.
( ) 50 pF mica.
( ) 24 pF mica.
( ) Solder the capacitor leads to the foil
and cut off the excess lead lengths.
CONTINUE
O
( ) Coil #40-691 (violet color dot). Hold
the coil base firmly against the
Switch-Board when soldering.
Rotary switch wafer, #63-397 (yellow
color dot). Position the color dot on the
switch wafer over the color dot on the
Switch-Board. Solder the pins to the
foil.
( ) Bend all switch lugs, except lug
10, forward out of the way. Do not
damage or bend the ring contacts
at the inside of the switch.
- --
m,/
NOTE: For clarity and identification
purposes, other drawings in this Man-
ual may show the switches with the lugs
extended.
) Coil #40-689 (red color dot).
( ) Coil #40-690 (orange color dot).
( ) Cut off the projecting switch mounting
pins on the foil side of this
Switch-Board only.
!( ) Check to see that all connections are
soldered. Disregard any unused holes in
the Switch-Board.
FINISH
PROCEED TO PICTORIAL 1-3
DRIVER GRID SWITCH BOARD
START
CONTINUE
o
NOTE: Solder the pins of the coils and switch
wafer as they are installed, but do not cut off
their pins after soldering.
( ) Coil #40-687 (green color dot).
( ) Coil #40-687 (green color dot).
( ) Coil #40-688 (black color dot).
( ) Rotary switch wafer, #63-396 (red
color dot). Position the color dot on the
switch wafer over the color dot on the
Switch-Board.
Page 1 1
CONTINUE
DRIVER PLATE SWITCH-BOARD
START
Position the driver plate Switch-Board
(#85-133*3) as shown.
( ) 1" bare wire. Use black hookup
wire with the insulation re-
moved.
| ( ) 36 pF mica.
( ) Solder all connections and cut off the
excess lead lengths.
NOTE: Solder the pins of the coils
and switch wafer as they are in-
stalled, but do not cut off their
pins after soldering.
( ) Coil #40-687 (green color dot).
( ) Coil #40-687 (green color dot).
( ) Coil #40-688 (black color dot).
( ) Rotary switch wafer #63-396 (red color
dot). Position the color dot of the
switch wafer over the color dot on the
Switch- Board.
Bend the unused switch lugs for-
ward out of the way. Do not dam-
age or bend the ring contacts at the
inside of the switch.
PICTORIAL 1-4
//
v . 'V
!
NOTH: For clarity and identification
purposes, other drawings in this Man-
ual may show the switches with the lugs
extended.
( ) Cut each lead of a 36 pF mica capacitor
to a length of 1/2”. Connect this
capacitor from lug 8 (NS) to lug 9 (S*l)
of the switch wafer.
( ) 22 kfl (red-red-orange) between lugs 8
(S-2) and 11 (S-l) of the switch wafer.
Be sure the resistor and capacitor clear
the switch rotor. Cut off the excess
leads.
( ) Coil #40-685 (gray color dot).
( ) Coil #40-686 (yellow color dot).
( ) Check to see that all connections are
soldered. Disregard any unused holes in
the Switch-Board.
FINISH
PROCEED TO “MODULATOR CIR-
CUIT BOARD.”
MODULATOR CIRCUIT BOARD
PARTS LIST #2
Open parts pack #2 and check each part against the
following parts list. The key numbers correspond to the
numbers in the Parts Pictorial. Parts that have been
illustrated previously have been omitted from this Parts
Pictorial. For pricing information, refer to the separate
"Heath Parts Price List."
KEY PART PARTS DESCRIPTION
No. No. Per Kit
RESISTORS (1 /2-Watt)
6-221
2
220 ft (red-red-brown)
6-471
1
470 ft (yellow-violet-brown)
6-102
2
1000 ft (brown-black-red)
6-202
2
2000 ft (red-black-red)
6-472
3
4700 ft (yellow-violet-red)
6-333
2
33 kft (orange-orange-
orange)
6-473
2
47 kft (yellow-violet-orange)
6-104
4
100 kft (brown-black-yellow)
6-154
1
150 kft (brown-green-yellow)
6-105
4
1 Mft (brown-black-green)
CAPACITORS
Mica
20-130
1
12 pF
20-77
1
24 pF
20-96
1
36 pF
20-97
1
50 pF
20-102
1
100 pF
Disc
21-13
1
500 pF
21-140
1
.001
21-27
2
.005 mF
21-16
3
.01 fiF
21-31
6
.02 juF
KEY PART PARTS
No. No. Per Kit
Other Capacitors
1 21-29 1
2 26-94 1
3 27-34 3
4 25-115 1
5 25-135 1
CRYSTALS
404-205 1
404-206 1
404-215 1
DIODES
6 56-87 4
7 57-27 2
MISCELLANEOUS
8
10-147
1
9
52-79
1
10
253-34
1
11
434-112
1
12
434-130
1
13
434-79
1
85-127-2
1
DESCRIPTION
4.7 pF (MMF) ceramic tubular
13 pF differential
.2 fiF Mylar*
10 juF electrolytic
20 fi F electrolytic
3393.6 kHz
3396.4 kHz
3395.4 kHz
FH-1100
1N2071
200 12 control
IF transformer
Fiber washer
7-pin socket
9-pin socket (with
ground clip)
9-pin socket (without
ground clip)
Circuit board
•DuPont Registered Trademark
Page 1 4
STEP-BY-STEP ASSEMBLY
START
Position the modulator circuit board
(#85-127-2) as shown.
On the foil side of some circuit boards you
will find lines in the foil which arc parallel to
an edge of the circuit hoard. Note that there
arc solder points (holes) close to each line.
The lines are “solder stops” to prevent solder
from running out to the edge of the board.
1)0 NOT allow any solder to gel on the
dashes or on the mounting edges of the cir-
cuit boards.
NOTE: DIODES MAY BE SUPPLIED
IN ANY OF THE FOLLOWING SHAPES.
THE CATHODE END OF THE DIODE
IS MARKED WITH A BAND OR
BANDS. ALWAYS POSITION THIS
END AS SHOWN IN THE PICTORIAL.
BAND OR BANDS
( ) 1N2071 diode (#57-27).
( ) 1N2071 diode (#57-27).
( ) 47 kft (yellow- violet-orange).
( ) 1 Mft (brown-black- green).
( ) 100 kft (brown-black-yellow).
( ) 1000 ft (brown-black-red).
( ) 2000 ft (red-black-red).
( ) 33 kft (orange-orange-orange).
( ) 100 kft (brown-black-yellow).
/ l 20 ft (red-red-brown).
( ) 220 ft (red-red-brown).
4700 ft (yellow- violet-red)
CONTINUE
< 3 >
( ) 1 Mft (brown-black- green)
( ) 150 kft (brown-green-yellow).
( ) 100 kft (brown-black- yellow).
( ) 4700 ft (yellow- violet-red).
( ) 1 Mft (brown-black- green).
( ) 100 kft (brown-black- yellow).
( ) 33 kft (orange-orange-orange).
( ) 1000 ft (brown-black-red).
Mount vertically.
( ) 1 Mft (brown-black-green).
) 470 ft (yellow- violet -brown).
) 47 kft (yellow- violet-orange).
PICTORIAL 2-1
Page 1 5
START
CONTINUE
o
NOTE: When you install Mylar
capacitors, position the banded end as
shown.
( ) .2 /iF Mylar. Note banded end.
( ) 500 pF disc.
( ) .01 /iF disc.
NOTE: When you install electrolytic
capacitors, position the positive (+)
lead at the plus (+) mark on the circuit
board.
( ) 10 pF electrolytic. Note (+)
marking.
( ) .02 /iF disc.
( ) .2 pF Mylar. Note banded end.
( ) .02 /i"F disc.
( ) .01 /iF disc.
NOTE: When you install an FH-1100
diode (#56-87), position the banded end
as shown.
( ) FH-1100 diode. Note banded end.
( ) FH-1100 diode. Note banded end. *
( ) ,02 pF disc, '
( ) 4.7 pF (MMF) tubular.
( ) .01 /iF disc. NOTE: There arc three *
holes at tliis location. Use the outer
holes for the capacitor leads.
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
the excess lead lengths.
( ) .2 pF Mylar. Position body to
clear outline of tube socket VI.
' Note banded end.
7 ( ) .001 /iF disc.
1 ( ) 12 pF mica.
4
1 ( ) 24 pF mica. Position the body so it will
ft clear the outline of tube socket V16
4 which will he installed later.
1 ( ) .02 /iF disc. Position the body so it will
i clear the outline of tube soeket V 16
which will be installed later.
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
the excess lead lengths.
( ) 36 pf mica.
( ) .02 /iF disc.
( ) 50 pF mica.
( ) 100 pF mica.
( ) FH-l 100 diode. Note banded end.
( ) FH-1100 diode. Note banded end.
i ( ) .005 iiF disc.
. ( ) 005 /iF disc.
( ) .02 fiV disc. NOTE: There arc three
holes at this location. Use the outer
holes lor the capacitor leads.
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
the excess lead lengths.
PROCEED TO PICTORIAL 2-3
PICTORIAL 2-2
Page 16
START
I NOTE: Solder the pins of each part to the
foil as it is installed. Do not cut off the
lugs of any of these parts after soldering.
( ) 3396.4 kHz crystal (#404-206).
( ) Solder the center pin to the
ground clip on the 9-pin tube
socket before you mount it in the
following step. Heat the center
pin and allow the solder to flow
onto the ground clip.
IMPORTANT: When you install tube
sockets on any circuit board, DO NOT
use the sockets with ground clips unless
they are specifially called for, as in the
following step.
SOLDER
( ) Install a 9-pin tube socket with
ground clip at Vl.
ALIGN ALL PINS
TO THEIR
RESPECTIVE
HOLES.
PRESS THE
SOCKET DOWN
UNTIL IT
SNAPS
IN PLACE.
( ) Install a 9-pin tube socket at VI 6.
( ) 13 pF differential capacitor
(#26-94). .w)
: . ; U U l ~
ftilfi
l( ) Install a 7 -pin tube socket at V2.
PICTORIAL 2-3
CONTINUE
o
( ) 20 fiF electrolytic. Note (+)
marking.
( ) 3393.6 kHz crystal (#404-205).
( ) 3395.4 kHz crystal (#404-215).
NOTE: Use a minimum of solder in the
following steps to prevent rosin from getting
into the control.
( ) Place a fiber washer on the shaft of a
200 ft control (#10-147). Then install
the control from the foil side of the
board. Solder the five tabs to the foil.
LETTERED SIDE
Itlllltll
FIBER
WASHER
( ) Solder a clipped-off resistor lead to the
case of 200 ft control and to the foil
shown. FOIL
SOLDER
OR,
( ) Check to see that all connections are
soldered before putting the board aside.
Disregard any unused holes.
FINISH
PROCEED TO “IF CIRCUIT HOARD.”
IF CIRCUIT BOARD
PARTS LIST #3
Page 17
Open parts pack #3 and check each part against the
following parts list. The key numbers correspond to the
numbers in the Parts Pictorial. Parts that have been
illustrated previously have been omitted from this Parts
Pictorial. For pricing information, refer to the separate
“Heath Parts Price List."
KEY PART
No. No.
PARTS DESCRIPTION
Per Kit
1/2- Watt
6-470
2
47 ft (yellow-violet-black)
6-151
1
1 50 ft (brown-green-brown)
6-221
1
220 ft (red-red-brown)
6-471
1
470 ft (yellow-violet-brown)
6-102
3
1000 ft (brown-black red)
6-332
1
3300 ft (orange-orange-red)
6-472
1
4700 ft (yellow-violet-red)
6-473
1
47 kft (yellow-violet-orange)
6-104
3
100 kft (brown-black-yeliow)
1-40
1
10 Mft (brown-black-blue)
1-Watt
1 1-5*1 1 22 kft (red-red-orange)
1 1-28-1 1 100 kft (brown-black-yellow)
CAPACITORS
Mica
20-97 1 50 pF
20- 102 1 100 pF
Disc
21- 13 2 500 pF
21-140 1 .001 /iF
21-27 2 .005 AiF
21-31 10 .02 aiF
Other Capacitors
27-34
2 27-19
KEY PART PARTS DESCRIPTION
No. No. Per Kit
COILS-TRANSFORMERS
3 40-487 1 300 juH coil
4 40-587 1 6.8 MHz trap coil
52-73 1 3.395 MHz IF transformer
52-79 1 3.395 MHz IF transformer
MISCELLANEOUS
57-27 1 1N2071 diode
85-128-4 1 IF circuit board
434-112 2 7-pin socket
434-79 1 9-pin socket
PARTS PICTORIAL
i
i
.2 a*F Mylar
1 /iF tubular (shape may vary)
Page 18
jS|
STEP-BY-STEP ASSEMBLY
START
Position tin* IF circuit board (#85- 128-4) as
sIlOWTl.
( ) 1000 ft (brown-black-red).
( ) .005 pF disc.
) 22 kft 1-watt (red-red-orange).
( ) ,02 pF disc.
( ) .02 pF disc.
( ) 100 kft I -watt (brmvn-blaek-vellow).
( ) 47 ft (\ ellow-violel-blaek).
( ) 47 ft (yellow \iolet-black).
( ) 150 ft (brown-green-brown).
( ) 100 kft (brown-black-yellow).
( ) Solder tin; leads to the foil and cut off
the excess lead lengths.
CONTINUE
( ) .001 pF disc.
( ; 50 pF mica.
( ) 220 ft (red-red-brown).
( ) .02 pF disc.
( ) 100 pF mica.
( ) 100 kft (brown-black-yellow).
( ) .005 pF disc.
( ) 500 pF disc.
( ) .02 pF disc.
( ) .02 pF disc.
( ) 1000 ft (brown-black-red).
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
excess lead lengths.
PROCEED TO PICTORIAL 3-2
PICTORIAL 3-1
Page 1 9
START
( ) .02 fiF disc.
( ) 1000 ft (brown-black-red). I ■
( ) .02 jiF disc.
( ) 10 Mft (brown-black-blue).
( ) .02 juF disc.
( ) 47 kft (yellow- violet-orange).
( ) 100 kft (brown-black-yellow).
( ) 500 pF disc.
( ) .02 juF disc.
( ) Solder till' leads lo the foil and nil off
the excess lead lengths.
PICTORIAL 3-2
CONTINUE <Z>
( ) 3300 ft (orange-orange-red).
( ) 1N2071 diode (#57-27). Note
cathode or banded end.
( ) 4700 ft (yellow- violet- red) and
.2 |iF Mylar combination. Note
banded end of capacitor.
■ 2ju F
SOLDER
AND
CUT OFF
SOLDE R
4700 AND
O CUT OFF
( ) 1 juF tubular. Note banded end.
( ) 300 jiH coil (orange-black-
brown) #40-487.
( ) 470 ft (yellow- violet-brown).
( ) .02 /i F disc.
( ) Solder I he lead> lo the foil and nil off
I he e\ees.s lead lengl hs.
PROCEED TO PICTORIAL 3-3
START
NOTE: Solder the connections of
each part as it is installed. Do not
cut off the lugs of these parts after
soldering,
( ) Install 7-pin tube sockets at V3
and V4,
( ) Install a 9-pin tube socket at VI 3,
( ) 3.395 MHz IF transformer (#52-
73). Note lug spacing.
( ) 6.8 MHz trap coil (#40-587).
Note lug spacing.
( ) 3.395 MM'/ transformer (#52-79). Note
lug spacing.
( ) Check to see that all connec-
tions are soldered before put-
ting the board aside.
FINISH
PROCEED TO ‘BANDPASS CIRCUIT
BOARD."
PICTORIAL 3-3
BANDPASS CIRCUIT BOARD
PARTS LIST #4
Open parts pack #4 and check each part against the
following parts list. The key numbers correspond to the
numbers in the Parts Pictorial. Parts that have been
illustrated previously have been omitted from the Parts
Pictorial. For pricing information, refer to the separate
“Heath Parts Price List."
KEY PART
PARTS DESCRIPTION
KEY PART
PARTS
DESCRIPTION
No. No.
Per Kit
No. No.
Per Kit
RESISTORS (1 /2-Watt)
DIODES
6-470
1 47 n (yellow-violet-black)
3 56-25
1
1N4166A (Appearance
6-331
4 330 n (orange-orange-brown)
may vary)
6-102
2 1000 fl (brown-black-red)
56-26
1
INI 91 (brown-white-
6-472
1 4700 n (yellow-violet-red)
brown)
6-103
1 10 kfl (brown-black-orange)
57-27
1
1N2071
6-473
1 47 kfl (yellow-violet-orange)
6-104
7 100 kfl (brown-black-yellow)
6-154
1 1 50 kfl (brown-green-yellow)
MISCELLANEOUS
6-474
2 470 kO (yellow-violet-yellow)
6-155
1 1.5 Mfl (brown-green-green)
404-43
1
100 kHz crystal
434-79
4
9-pin socket
85-129-6
1
Bandpass circuit board
CAPACITORS
Mica
20-97
3
50 pF
20-102
2
100 pF
Disc
21-140
1
.001 juF
21-27
3
.005 ;uF
21-31
7
.02 ;uF
Other Capacitors
25-115
1
10 juF electrolytic
27-34
1
.2 juF Mylar
1 31-36
1
8-50 pF trimmer
COILS-TRANSFORMERS
45-51
1
15 juH RF choke
40-1023
1
Plate tank mixer coil
2 52-65
1
Bandpass transformer
PARTS PICTORIAL
STEP-BY-STEP ASSEMBLY
START
Position the bandpass circuit board
(#85-129-6) as shown.
( ) 10 kft (brown-black-orange).
( ) 330 SI (orange -orange -brown).
( ) 47 kSl (yellow- violet-orange).
( ) 100 k SI (brown-black-yellow).
( ) 330 SI (orange-orange-brown).
( ) 330 SI (orange-orange-brown).
( ) 1-3/4” wire. Use black hookup
wire from pack #1 with 1/4”
insulation removed from each
end.
( ) 47 SI (yellow- violet-black).
( ) 100 k SI (brown-black-yellow).
( ) 1000 SI (brown-black- red).
( ) 100 k SI (brown-black- yellow).
( ) 100 kfi (brown-black-yellow).
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
the excess lead lengths.
CONTINUE
<3>
( ) 4700 SI (yellow- violet- red).
flptiii
( ) 100 k£2 (brown-black- yellow).
( ) 150 kf2 (brown-green- yellow).
( ) 1.5 M SI (brown-green-green).
( ) 470 k SI (yellow-violet- yellow).
( ) 330 SI (orange-orange-brown).
( ) 100 kSl (brown-black- yellow).
( ) 100 k SI (brown-black-yellow).
jk|| i(
( ) 1-1/2” wire. Use black hookup
wire with 1/4” of insulation re-
moved from each end.
118 i
( ) 1000 SI (brown-black-red).
( ) 470 k SI (yellow-violet-yellow).
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
the excess lead lengths.
1 >■' 1
PROCEED TO PICTORIAL 4-2
PICTORIAL 4-1
% i/', 14 O 1” 2” 3” 4” 5” 6”
I ■ i i i ■ I i I i I i 1 i I i I i I
Page 22
SE
CONTINUE
SMRT
f ) 1N191 diode (#56-26, brown-
white-brown). Note banded
end.
( ) 50 pF mica.
( ) 50 pF mica.
|S|1 »i
( ) 100 pF mica.
( ) 100 pF mica. Position to clear
the tube socket to be installed
later.
( ) 15 /ill KF choke (#45-51). (tend each
lead toward the slot.
( ) .001 11 F disc.
( ) .02 pF disc.
( ) .02 pF disc.
( ) .02 pF disc.
( ) 10 pF electrolytic. Note (+)
marking.
( ) 50 pF mica.
( ) .02 /nF disc,
( ) *02 p F disc.
wmmumum.
( ) .005 pF disc.
( ) .02 pF disc.
ImBI ^
( ) 1N2071 diode (#57-27). Note
cathode end.
( ) .02 pF disc.
( ) .005 pF disc.
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
excess lead lengths.
hm^m
( ) 1N4166A diode (#56-25). Note
banded end.
s 1
( ) .005 pF disc.
( ) .2 4 F Mylar. Note banded end.
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
the excess lead Icngl hs.
PROCEED TO PICTORIAL 4-3
PICTORIAL 4-2
Page 23
START
NOTH: Solder the pins of each part as it is
installed. Do not cut off the lugs of these
parts after soldering.
( ) Install 9-pin tube sockets at
V5, V12, V17, and V19.
PICTORIAL 4-3
AUDIO CIRCUIT BOARD
PARTS LIST #5
KEY PART PARTS
No. No. Per Kit
RESISTORS
1/4-Watt
6-474-12 6
1/2- Watt
6-101
6-331
6-102
6-472
6-223
6-473
6-104
6-224
6-334
6-474
6-684
6-105
6-225
6-335
1-Watt
1-3-1 1
7-Watt
1 3-15-7 1
3-16-7 1
CAPACITORS
Mica
20-128 5
Open parts pack #5 and check each part against the
following parts list. The key numbers correspond to the
numbers in the Parts Pictorial. Parts that have been
illustrated previously have been omitted from this Parts
Pictorial. For pricing information, refer to the separate
"Heath Parts Price List."
DESCRIPTION
470 kfi (yellow-violet
yellow)
100 O (brown-black-brown)
330 fi (orange-orange
brown)
1000 fi (brown-black-red)
4700 fi (yellow-violet-red)
22 kfi (red-red-orange)
47 kfi (yellow-violet-orange)
100 kfi (brown-black-yellow)
220 kfi (red-red-yellow)
330 kfi (orange-orange
yellow)
470 kfi (yellow-violet-
yellow)
680 kfi (blue-gray-yellow)
1 Mfi (brown-black-green)
2.2 Mfi (red-red-green)
3.3 Mfi (orange-orange-
green)
3300 fi (orange-orange-red)
1000 fi (1 kfi)
2500 fi (2.5 kfi)
PARTS DESCRIPTION
Per Kit
KEY PART
No. No.
Disc
21-13 1
21-140 2
21-27 8
21-16 2
21-31 7
Electrolytic
25-135 1
DIODES
57-27 1
SOCKETS
434-112 1
434-79 2
MISCELLANEOUS
2 432-734 3
85-130-4 1
85-2138-1 1
PARTS
500 pF
.001 nF
.005 /xF
.01 mF
.02 mF
20 mF
1N2071
7-pin
9-pin
F connector
Audio circuit board
Phase shift circuit
board
PICTORIAL
470 pF
STEP-BY-STEP ASSEMBLY
START
Position the audio circuit board (#85-130-2)
as shown.
( ) 47 kft (yellow-violet-orange).
( ) 22 kft (red-red-orange).
( ) 1000 ft (brown- black- red).
( ) 4700 ft (yellow-violet-red).
( ) 330 kft (orange-orange-yellow).
( ) 3300 ft 1 watt (orange -orange-
red).
( ) .005 n F disc.
( ) .005 fxF disc.
( ) 47 kft (yellow- violet-orange).
( ) 330 kft(orange-orange-yellow).
( ) 1 Mft (brown-black- green).
( ) 1 Mft (brown-black- green).
( ) .001 ju F disc.
( ) 470 kft (yellow- violet-yellow).
( ) .005 pF disc.
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
the excess lead lengths.
CONTINUE
( ) .02 jLtF disc.
( ) 47 kn (yellow- violet-orange).
( ) 47 kft (yellow- violet-orange).
( ) 47 kfi (yellow- violet- orange).
( ) 47 kn (yellow- violet-orange).
( ) 47 kft (yellow-violet-orange)
and a 500 pF disc combination.
( ) .005 n F disc.
( ) .01 /jF disc.
( ) 22 kft (red-red-orange).
( ) 470 k ft (yellow-violet-yellow).
( ) ,005 fj . F disc.
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
the excess lead lengths.
PROCEED TO PICTORIAL 5-2
PICTORIAL 5-1
Page 26
CONTINUE
START
( ) 1N2071 diode. (#57-27). Note
cathode end.
) 680 kSl (blue-gray-yellow).
) 680 kS2 (blue-gray-yellow).
) 100 SI (brown-black-brown).
1 MSI (brown-black-green).
( ) .02 jiF disc.
( ) .02 /lxK disc.
( ) 100 SI (brown-black- brown).
( ) 100 kSl (brown-black-yellow).
) .005 4 F disc.
v ) 470 kSl (yellow- violet-yellow).
( ) .005 4F disc.
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
the excess lead lengths.
Position the phase shift circuit board
(#85-2138-1) as shown.
In some of the following steps you
will install F connectors. First, from
the component side, insert the pins
into the circuit board holes and press
them in until the connector body
rests against the circuit board. Then
solder the pins to the foil. Be sure
each connector is down against the
circuit board.
( ) .02 pF disc.
( ) .02 /iF disc.
) .001 ^F disc.
) F connector.
( ) 470 kfl (yellow-violet-yellow).
( ) 470 kfl (yellow-violet-yellow).
( ) 470 kfl (yellow-violet-yellow).
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and
cut off the excess lead lengths.
PICTORIAL 5-2
( ) 22 kSl (red-red-orange).
( ) 220 kSl (red-red-yellow).
( ) 3.3 MSI (orange-orange-green).
( ) 330 U (orange-orange-brown).
( ) .02 4 F disc.
( ) 470 kSl (yellow-violet-yellow).
( ) 2.2 MSI (red -red-green). Install In a
vertical position.
( ) .005 4F disc.
( ) .02 jiF disc.
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and cut off
the excess lead lengths.
PROCEED TO PICTORIAL 5-3
CONTINUE
) F connector.
( ) 470 kfl (yellow-violet-yellow).
( ) 470 kfl (yellow-violet-yellow).
470 pF mica.
{ ) 470 pF mica.
) 470 kfl (yellow-violet-yellow).
) 470 pF mica.
) 470 pF mica.
( ) 470 pF mica.
( ) .01 /xF disc.
F connector.
PICTORIAL 5-3
( ) Solder the leads to the foil and
cut off the excess lead lengths.
PROCEED TO PICTORIAL 5-4.
( ) 20 jj. F electrolytic. Note (+)
marking,
( ) Check to see that all connections
are soldered before putting the
board aside.
PICTORIAL 5-4
FINISH
PROCEED TO “RF DRIVER CIRCUIT
BOARD.”
3 Ay 2 % O
Page 28
RF DRIVER CIRCUIT BOARD
PARTS LIST #6
Open parts pack #6 and check each part against the
following parts list. The key numbers correspond to the
numbers in the Parts Pictorial. Parts that have been
illustrated previously have been omitted from the Parts
Pictorial. For pricing information, refer to the separate
“Heath Parts Price List."
KEY PART PARTS DESCRIPTION
No. No. Per Kit
KEY PART PARTS DESCRIPTION
No. No. Per Kit
RESISTORS
SOCKETS
1/2- Watt
6-151
1
150 D (brown-green-brown)
6-221
1
220 H (red-red-brown)
6-331
1
330 fl (orange-orange-
brown)
6-472
1
4700 0 (yellow-violet-red)
6-103
1
10 kfl (brown-black-orange)
6-223
1
22 kfl (red-red-orange)
6-104
5
100 kfl (brown-black-yellow)
6-154
1
1 50 kfl (brown-green-yellow)
6-474
1
470 kfl (yellow-violet-yellow)
6-105
2
1 MU (brown-black-green)
6-335
1
3.3 MO (orange-orange-
green)
CAPACITORS
20-77
2
24 pF mica
20-105
1
180 pF mica
21-140
1
.001 (JiF disc
21-27
6
.005 juF disc
21-31
11
.02 i±F disc
1 26-122
1
2-section variable
434-112 2
434-129 1
434-130 1
MISCELLANEOUS
85-131-6 1
7-pin socket
7-pin socket (with
ground clip)
9-pin socket (with
ground clip)
RF driver circuit board
PARTS PICTORIAL
ElEih
Page 29
STEP-BY-STEP ASSEMBLY
START
Position the driver circuit board (#85-131-6)
as shown.
( ) .005 /iF disc.
( ) .02 /iF disc.
( ) .02 /liF disc.
.02 /iF disc.
.02 4 F disc.
.02 4F disc.
22 kQ (red- red- orange).
1 (brown-black- green).
100 kQ (brown-black-yellow).
1-3/4” wire. Use black hookup
wire with 1/4” of insulation re-
moved from each end.
.001 /iF disc.
.005 /iF disc.
330 Q (orange-T>range-brown).
100 kQ (brown-black- yellow).
24 pF mica.
10 kQ (brown-black- orange).
CONTINUE
P
( ) 150 Q (brown- green- brown).
( ) .02 mF disc.
( ) .005 /iF disc.
( ) .02 /iF disc.
( ) 4700 Q (yellow-violet-red).
( ) 100 kQ (brown-black- yellow).
( ) 150 kft (brown- green- yellow).
( ) 180 pF mica.
( ) .02 juF disc.
( ) .02 /iF disc.
( ) .02 /iF disc.
( ) 24 pF mica.
( ) .005 /iF disc.
( ) 1 (brown- black- green).
( ) 100 kft (brown-black- yellow).
( ) 100 kQ (brown-black- yellow).
( ) .005 /iF disc.
( ) .005 /iF disc.
Page 30
SI-
START
( ) Solder the center pin to the
ground clip on the 7 and 9-pin
tube sockets before mounting
them on the circuit boards. Heat
the center pin and allow the
solder to flow onto the ground
clip. NOTE: Use the sockets
with ground clips only where
they are specifically called for
NOTE: Solder the connections of
each part as it is installed. Do not
cut off the lugs of any of these parts
after soldering.
( ) Install a 7-pin tube socket with
ground clip at V6.
( ) Install 7-pin tube sockets at V10
and VI 1.
( ) Install a 9-pin tube socket with
ground clip at V7.
CAUTION: Keep the plates of vari-
able capacitors fully meshed at all
times to prevent them from being
damaged during the assembly of the
kit.
( ) Locate a 2-section variable ca-
pacitor (#26-122). Bend both
lugs, as shown, on the indicated
side of the capacitor.
NOTE : This capacitor will be mount
ed later.
wmmmmm
f Soil
; m
I1H
l»
CONTINUE
o
( ) 2-section variable capacitor.
) Bend out the tip of the solder lug on
the rear of the capacitor as shown
above.
( ) Prepare a 2-3/4” large red wire by
removing 1/4” of insulation from each
end. Connect one end of this wire to
the solder lug on the rear of the variable
capacitor (S-l). The other end of. this
wire will be connected later.
) Check to see that all connections
are soldered before putting the
board aside.
FINISH
The remaining items from the “Wire-Sleeving”
and the “Miscellaneous groups” of “Parts List
#1” should be retained for use later. All other
parts in the preceding parts lists should have
been used in the assembly of circuit boards.
PROCEED TO “VFO.”
PICTORIAL 6-2
i
2”
J
4 ” 5 ” 6 ”
J i I i l
VFO
PARTS LIST #7
Open parts pack #7 and check each part against the
following parts list. The key numbers correspond to the
numbers in the Parts Pictorial. Parts that have been
illustrated previously have been omitted from this Parts
Pictorial. For pricing information, refer to the separate
"Heath Parts Price List/'
KEY PART
No. No.
PARTS DESCRIPTION
Per Kit
RESISTORS
1/2- Watt
6-470
2
47 fl (yellow-violet-black)
6-101
1
100 H (brown-black-brown)
6-471
2
470 O (yellow-violet-brown)
6-102
1
1000 O (brown-black-red)
6-472
2
4700 H (yellow-violet-red)
6-103
1
10 kfi (brown-biack-orange)
6-474
1
470 k H (yellow-violet-
yellow)
CAPACITORS
Disc
21-3
1
10 pF
21-147
1
47 pF
21-85
1
56 pF
21-144
1
4700 pF (.0047)
21-27
3
.005 fj . F
21-31
Other Capacitors
2
.02 fiF
1 100-1759
1
1.7 to 24 pF mica trimmer
(May be marked 31-92)
2 26-132
1
9-63 pF variable
21-29
1
4.7 pF ceramic tubular (MMF)
3 21-41
1
14 pF ceramic tubular
(brown-yellow-black-green)
4 29-4
1
1800 plastic tubular
HBATHKIT'
PARTS PICTORIAL
31
Page 32
HEATHKir]
KEY PART
PARTS
DESCRIPTION
KEY PART
PARTS
DESCRIPTION
No.
No.
Per Kit
No.
No.
Per Kit
HARDWARE
MISCELLANEOUS
#3 Hardware
23
40-1076
1
VFO coil
5
250-49
5
3-48 x 1 /4" screw
24
52-103
1
Transformer
6
254-7
8
#3 lock washer
25
56-26
1
1N191 diode (brown
7
252-1
5
3-48 nut
26
75-87
3
white-brown)
Nylon feedthrough
#4 Hardware
27
100-1041
1
Jackson drive
8
250-285
3
4-40 x 1 /4" screw
28
200-590-1
1
VFO chassis
9
250-273
2
4-40 x 3/8" screw
29
201-49
1
VFO chassis base
10
250-248
7
4-40 x 1/2"
30
205-761
1
Drive mounting plate
self -tapping screw
31
205-762
1
VFO front plate
11
252-15
4
4-40 nut
32
255-45
1
9/16" phenolic spacer
12
253-59
3
Spring washer
33
266-200
1
Plastic clutch
13
253-80
2
#4 flat washer
350-12
1
Cement
14
254-9
4
#4 lock was her
34
352-13
1
Silicone grease
35
417-118
1
2N3393 transistor
#6
Hardware
15
250-56
10
6-32 x 1/4" screw
16
250-89
3
6-32 x 3/8" screw
17
250-170
8
#6 x 1/4" sheet
36
417-169
1
MPF-105 field-effect
metal screw
transistor
19
251-1
4
#6 spade bolt
37
431-62
3
3-lug terminal strip
20
252-3
8
6-32 nut
38
434-34
1
7-pin socket
21
254-1
16
#6 lock washer
39
434-44
1
Pilot lamp socket
22
259-6
1
#6 small solder lug
40
434-42
1
Phono socket
489-1
1
Sandpaper
STEP-BY-STEP ASSEMBLY
The illustrations in the "Step-by-Step Assembly" section of
the Manual are called Pictorials and Details. Pictorials show
the overall operation for a group of assembly steps; Details
are used in addition to the Pictorials to illustrate a single
step. When you are directed to refer to a certain Pictorial
"for the following steps," continue using that Pictorial until
you are referred to another Pictorial for another group of
steps.
As you mount a part, use the hardware specified in the step.
Only the size and type of hardware to be used will usually
be called out in a step. For example, "Use 3-48 x 1/4"
hardware" means to use a 3-48 x 1/4" screw, one or more
#3 lockwashers, and a 3-48 nut. Refer to the Details
associated with the step for the proper installation of the
hardware and the correct number of lockwashers.
The plastic nut starter (#490-5) will help you pick up a nut
and start it on the screw threads. Be sure to tighten the
hardware after you mount a part.
Page 34
For VFO stability it is IMPORTANT that each part be
positioned exactly as shown in the photograph on the
fold-out from this page. Refer to this photograph when you
install resistors and capacitors in the VFO.
Refer to Pictorial 7-1 for the following steps.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-1 A and mount a 7-pin socket at V20.
Position the wide space between the lugs as shown by
the arrow in the Pictorial. At FD, use a 3-48 x 1/4"
screw, a #6 small solder lug shaped as shown, a #3
lockwasher and a 348 nut. At FC, use a 3-48 x 1/4"
screw, two #3 lockwashers, a 3-lug terminal strip, and
a 348 nut.
© 3-48 NUT
gj>i #3 LOCKWASHER
Detail 7-1 C
( ) Mount a 3-lug terminal strip at FH. Use a 3-48 x 1/4"
screw, two #3 lockwashers, and a 348 nut.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-1 C and mount the transformer
(#52-103) at FZ. Use a #4 lockwasher and a 4 40 nut
at each mounting hole.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-1 D and mount a phono socket at FJ.
Use a 6-32 x 1/4" screw, a #6 lockwasher, and a 6-32
nut at each mounting hole. Position the lugs of the
socket as shown in the Pictorial.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-1 B and
mount a 3-lug terminal strip
at FF. Use a 3-48 x 1/4"
screw, two #3 lockwashers,
and a 3-48 nut.
Detail 7-1 B
Detail 7-ID
Q942
R949
C952
C954
R948
CR941
R945
C945
R946
C946
R947
C951
R951
Q941
C949
C953
L941
Q
( ) Refer to Detail 7-1 E and mount a 1.7 to 24 n
trimmer at FE. Use a 3-48 x 1/4" screw, a
lockwasher, and a 3-48 nut.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-1 F and mount the VFO coil
1076) at FM. Note the position of the locating
Push the coil into its hole until the mounting t
snap into place.
PICTORIAL 7-1
Detail 7-1 F
Page 36
FOR
GOOD SOLDER
y
CONNECTIONS, YOU MUST
KEEP
THE SOLDERING ✓
//
IRON
TIP CLEAN...
/ /y
WIPE
IT OFTEN WITH A
DAMP
SPONGE OR CLOTH.
Refer to Pictorial 7-2 (fold-out from Page 43) for the
following steps.
Connect the wires from transformer FZ as follows:
( ) Red to lug 1 of terminal strip FC (NS).
( ) Blue to lug 5 of tube socket V20 (S-1 ).
( ) Black to lug 2 of phono socket FJ (NS).
( ) White to lug 1 of phono socket FJ (S-1 ).
( ) Connect a .005 disc capacitor between lugs 1 (NS) and
2 (NS) of terminal strip FF.
( ) Connect a .005 fiF disc capacitor from lug 6 of tube
socket V20 (NS) to solder lug FD (S-1).
( ) Connect one end of a 100 12 (brown-black-brown)
resistor to lug 3 of terminal strip FC (NS). Connect
the other end of this resistor to lug 1 of terminal strip
FF (NS).
NOTE: To prepare a piece of hookup wire, cut it to the
length specified and remove 1/4" of insulation from each
end.
( ) Prepare a 3" white hookup wire and a 3" brown
hookup wire. Refer to Detail 7-2B and form a twisted
pair from these two wires.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-2A and start the leads of two .02 /iF
disc capacitors into the lower holes of a 3-lug terminal
strip as shown in Part A. Before soldering, push the
capacitors down, as shown in Part B, so the lower
edges of the capacitors are even with the top edge of
the insulator strip. Then solder the leads at lugs 1, 2,
and 3 and cut off the excess leads.
PART A
SOLDER LEADS AND
CUT OFF EXCESS
Detail 7-2A
NOTE: When you connect capacitors into the VFO, shorten
the leads as much as possible.
In the following steps, a disc capacitor and a resistor will be
connected to lug 3 of terminal strip FF. Position these parts
so they do not extend beyond the end of the terminal strip.
( ) Connect a .005 (JtF disc capacitor between lugs 2 (NS)
and 3 (NS) of terminal strip FF.
Detail 7-2B
( ) At one end of this twisted pair, connect the white wire
to lug 4 (S-1) and the brown wire to lug 3 (S-1) of
tube socket V20.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-2C and insert the smaller end of a
nylon feedthrough in hole FK from the outside of the
VFO chassis. Press it firmly into place.
F E E DT HR OUGH
3 4 y 2 %
I i 1 » L »
i
1 ”
_ 1 _
1
2”
_L_
Detail 7-2C
3 ”
l
( ) At the free end of the twisted pair, connect the white
wire to lug 2 of phono socket FJ (S-2) and connect
the brown wire to feedthrough FK (S-1 ).
( ) Insert a nylon feedthrough in hole FL.
( ) Connect one lead of a 470 £2 (yellow-violet-brown)
resistor to lug 1 of terminal strip FC (S-2). Connect
the other lead to feedthrough FL (NS).
NOTE: Where a wire passes through a connection and then
goes to another point, as in the next step, it will count as
two wires in the solder instructions, one entering and one
leaving the connection.
( ) Pass one lead of a 47 £2 (yellow-violet-black) resistor
through lug 2 of tube socket V20 (S-2) to lug 3 of
terminal strip FC (S-2). Connect the other end of this
resistor to lug 7 of tube socket V20 (S-1 ).
( ) Connect one end of a 470 £2 (yellow-violet-brown)
resistor to lug 6 of tube socket V20 (S-2). Connect the
other end of this resistor to feedthrough FL (S-2).
( ) Connect one end of a 4700 £2 (yellow-violet-red)
resistor to lug 1 of tube socket V20 (NS). Connect the
other end of this resistor to lug 1 of terminal strip FF
(S-3). CAUTION: DO NOT fill the opening in the lug
with solder, as two additional wires will be connected
later.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-2D and identify the leads of a
2N3393 transistor (#417-118). Clip off the C lead
close to the body of the transistor.
CUP OFF
THIS LEAD
Detail 7-2D
Page 37
( ) Connect the E lead of the transistor to lug 1 (NS) and
the B lead to lug 2 (NS) of terminal strip FF.
( ) Insert a nylon feedthrough in hole FN.
( ) Connect one end of a 4700 £2 (yellow-violet-red)
resistor to lug 3 of terminal strip FF (NS). Connect
the other end of this resistor to feedthrough FN (S-1).
( ) Connect one end of a 10 k£2 (brown-black-orange)
resistor to lug 3 of terminal strip FF (S-3). Connect
the other end of this resistor to lug 1 of trimmer
capacitor FG (NS).
( ) Connect the banded end of a 1 N1 91 diode (#56-26)
to lug 2 of terminal strip FF (NS). Connect the other
end of this diode to lug 1 of trimmer capacitor FG
(S-2). Be sure to position the banded end as shown.
3
Detail 7-2E
Refer to Detail 7-2E for the next three steps. Save one of
the cut-off resistor leads for use later.
( ) Connect a 1000 £2 (brown-black-red) resistor from the
lower hole of lug 2 (NS) to the lower hole of lug 3
(S-1) of terminal strip FH. Be careful that the lead at
lug 3 does not extend beyond the end of the terminal
strip.
( ) Connect a 470 k£2 (yellow-violet-yellow) resistor from
the lower hole of lug 1 (S-1 ) to the lower hole of lug 2
(S-2) of terminal strip FH.
( ) Connect the cut-off resistor lead from lug 2 of
trimmer FG (S-1) to lug 3 of terminal strip FH (NS).
{ ) Pass one lead of the 14 pF (brown-yellow- black-green)
ceramic tubular capacitor through lug 2 (NS) to lug TP
(NS) of coil FM. Connect the other I6ad to lug 3 of
coil FM (NS). Position the body of the capacitor
against the winding on the coil form.
( ) Prepare a 1-3/4” length of black hookup wire.
( ) Connect one end of this hookup wire to lug 3 of coil
FM (S-2). The free end of this wire will be connected
later.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-2F and identify the position of the
D # S, and G leads of the MPF-105 transistor
(#417-169). Form the leads as shown in the Detail.
CAUTION: When you solder the leads of the transistor to be
installed in the following steps, prevent heat damage to the
transistor by gripping each lead with a pair of long-nosed
pliers between the transistor and the soldering point. This
serves as a heat sink to dissipate excess heat which might
cause damage. Keep the pliers on the lead for about 10
seconds after you remove the soldering iron. A rubber band
can be placed around the handles of the pliers to hold them
closed, thus leaving both hands free for soldering.
Position the #417-169 transistor as shown in the Pictorial.
Be sure the body of the transistor does not touch anything
else. Then connect the leads as follows:
( ) G lead to lug 1 of terminal strip FH (NS).
( ) D lead to lug 1 of coil FM (NS).
( ) S lead to lug 3 of terminal strip FH (S-2).
( ) Cut one lead of a 4.7 pF ceramic tubular capacitor to
a length of 3/8”. Connect this lead to lug 1 of terminal
strip FH (S-2). The other lead will be connected later.
% O 1” 2”
l 1 1 ■ i i j i \ ■ L_
( ) Place a 1 ” length of small black sleeving on each lead
of a 10 pF disc capacitor. Connect one lead to lug 1 of
coil FM (S-2). Connect the other lead to lug 1 of tube
socket V20 (S-2).
( ) Place a 1 ” length of small black sleeving on one lead of
a 47 £2 (yellow-violet-black) resistor, and connect this
lead to lug 1 of terminal strip FF (S-2). Three wires
were previously soldered to this connection. Connect
the other lead to lug TP of coil FM (NS).
l
Refer to Pictorial 7-3 for the following steps.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-3A and assemble a 4700 pF (.0047)
disc capacitor and an 1800 pF plastic tubular
capacitor combination as shown (S-2). Cut off the
excess leads of the tubular capacitor only. NOTE:
Pictorial 7-3 shows the leads of this capacitor
combination longer than they should be (for clarity).
Observe that one end of the tubular capacitor is
colored and the other end is unmarked.
Detail 7-3A
NOTE: The capacitor combination will be installed in the
following step. The Pictorial shows this combination
positioned so you can see the connections. When the
capacitors are installed, however, they must be placed in a
vertical position with the tubular capacitor toward the
chassis. Fit the capacitors into place before you solder or cut
any leads.
( ) Connect the banded lead of the capacitor assembly to
lug 2 of terminal strip FH (S-1). Connect the other
lead to lug 2 of coil FM (S-3). Make sure these
capacitors do not touch the coil form.
3 ” 4 ” 5 ” 6 ”
J i I i I i l
Page 39
PICTORIAL 7-3
Refer to Pictorial 7-4 (fold-out from Page 43) for the
following steps.
( ) Cut the leads of a 56 pF and a 47 pF disc capacitor to a
length of 1 12 ". Connect one lead of each capacitor to the
TP lug of coil FM (S-4). The other leads will be con-
nected later.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-4A and mount the VFO front plate
(#205-762) on the VFO chassis base. Use 6-32 x 3/8”
hardware at HA and HB. Turn the screws only
finger-tight at this time.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-4A and mount a 9/16” phenolic
spacer at HC on the VFO chassis base. Use a 6-32 x
3/8” screw. Turn the screw finger-tight only. This
screw will fit only one end of the spacer.
VFO
CHASSIS
Detail 7-4A
• INSET
4-40 NUT
= 4 LOCKWASHER
W^J/j 4 FIATWASHER
SCREW
sir^\ remove
BPV and
DISCARD
4 40 x 3/8" SCREW
Detail 7-4B
( ) Refer to Detail 7-4B and install a Jackson drive
(#1 00-1 041 ) on the VFO chassis base at HD. Use 4-40
x 3/8" hardware in slots HE and HF. Turn the screws
finger-tight only.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-4B and remove and discard the two
brass screws from the round collar of the Jackson
drive. Use the sandpaper furnished to remove any
burrs around the two holes.
6-32x1/4” SCREW
#6 LOCKWASHER
Detail 7-4C
Refer to Detail 7-4C and mount the variable capacitor at FB
on the VFO chassis as directed in the following steps.
NOTE: Observe the following precautions when mounting
the VFO capacitor in the following steps.
1. Be sure to keep the plates of the variable capacitor
fully meshed to avoid damage while handling it.
2. DO NOT tighten the capacitor mounting screws until
you are certain that all eight lock washers are in place.
( ) Before permanently mounting the variable capacitor,
temporarily mount it at FB with only two of the 6-32
x 1/4" screws. Then visually check to make sure
nothing connected to lug TP of the coil FM touches
the variable capacitor. If it does, move the component
or lead as necessary. Then remove the two screws and
the variable capacitor.
3. Be very careful to use 6-32 x 1/4" screws only. A
longer screw might contact the capacitor stator plates,
damaging them, and possibly causing a short circuit.
Refer to inset drawing of Pictorial 7-4 for the following
three steps:
( ) Bend lugs 3 and 4 out away from the capacitor as
shown in Part 1 of the Detail.
( ) Bend lugs 1 and 2 outward to provide clearance for
connections as shown in Part 2 of the Detail.
( ) Cut off lugs 3 and 4 as close as possible to the
insulating material.
( ) Place the capacitor on the VFO chassis base as shown.
( ) Put a #6 lockwasher on each of four 6-32 x 1/4"
screws and place the screws in a convenient position.
( ) Center a #6 lockwasher carefully over each of the four
mounting holes on the capacitor frame. A small
amount of silicone grease around each hole will help
to hold the lockwashers in position. Refer to the inset
drawing of the Detail.
( ) Hold the VFO chassis with its mounting holes aligned
with those in the capacitor frame. Be careful not to
disturb the lockwashers. Start one of the four 6-32 x
1/4" screws with lockwashers in each of the four
capacitor holes. After all have been started, seat them
finger-tight only.
Page 41
HEATHKir]
( ) Connect the 1-3/4" black hookup wire from lug 3 of
coil FM to lug 1 of the variable capacitor (NS).
( ) Connect the free lead of the 4.7 pF ceramic tubular
capacitor to lug 1 of the variable capacitor (S-2).
( ) Connect the free leads of the 56 pF and 47 pF disc
capacitors to lug 2 of the variable capacitor (S-2).
Spread these capacitors as far apart as possible
without touching any other component.
( ) Refer to Detail 7-4D and mount #6 spade bolts at FP,
FR, FX, and FY. Use &-32 x 1/4" hardware.
( ) Carefully inspect the interior of the VFO to make sure
all joints are soldered and that there are no short
circuits to the chassis. Shake out any wire clippings or
bits of solder.
Detail 7-4D
#6 x 1 / 4 ' '
SHEET METAL
Detail 7-4E
( ) Refer to Detail 7-4E and assemble the VFO chassis
base to the VFO chassis. Place the variable capacitor
shaft into the recess in the Jackson drive. Note that
the chassis base is notched out to clear components at
terminal strip FF. Use #6 x 1/4" sheet metal screws at
the seven holes shown. Leave hole FU open. Make sure
the wires from FZ are not pinched.
( ) Tighten the hardware in the following sequence:
1 . Four variable capacitor mounting screws.
2. Two Jackson drive mounting screws.
3. Loosen the four capacitor mounting screws.
4. Spacer screw at hole HC.
5. Screws at holes HA and HB.
6. Setscrews in the Jackson drive hub.
7. Tighten the four capacitor mounting screws.
Page 42
JS§?
1
Detail 7-4F
( ) Refer to Detail 7-4F and mount a pilot lamp socket at
FU. Use a #6 x 1/4" sheet metal screw.
( ) Bend the socket mounting bracket to an angle of
approximately 45 degrees.
( ) Check to make sure that one of the sheet metal screws
does not touch lug 3 of terminal strip FF. If necessary,
loosen the terminal strip mounting screw and turn the
terminal strip slightly.
Detail 7-4G
( ) Refer to Detail 7-4G and insert seven 4-40 x 1/2"
self-tapping screws in the drive mounting plate
(#205-761). Insert the screws until about one-third of
their length emerges on the back side of the plate.
( ) Remove the seven screws. Four of these screws will be
used later in "Chassis Assembly" section. Discard the
other three screws.
Page 43
4-40 xl/4"
SCREW
Detail 7-4H
Refer to Detail 7-4H for the next two steps.
( ) Place the larger portion of the opening in the drive
mounting plate over the collar of the Jackson drive and
slide the plate down behind the collar.
( ) Place the plastic clutch (#266-200) on the Jackson
drive shaft and secure it to the drive mounting plate
with three 4-40 x 1/4" screws and three #4 spring
washers. Do not tighten these screws. Note the inset
drawing for the position of the washers.
( ) Adjust each of the three 4-40 screws until its end is
flush with the inner surface of the drive mounting
plate. Then turn each screw one turn counterclockwise.
The white clutch disc should then be parallel with the
drive mounting plate, which, when turned by hand,
should be quite stiff.
( ) Refer to the fold-out from Page 34 and tip C946 so that it
touches the side of the VFO chassis. Then use the
cement provided to secure the capacitor to the chassis
side.
( ) Place the VFO to one side. It will be mounted later.
NOTE: Retain items such as wire, sleeving, silicone grease,
etc., for use later.
CHASSIS
PARTS LIST #8
Check each of the remaining parts against the following parts
list. The key numbers correspond to the numbers in the Parts
Pictorial. Parts that have been illustrated previously have been
omitted from this Parts Pictorial. Replace parts in the small
envelopes with a part number on them until those parts are
called for in steps. For pricing information, refer to the separate
“Heath Parts Price List.”
KEY PART
PARTS DESCRIPTION
KEY PART
PARTS
DESCRIPTION
No. No.
Per Kit
No. No.
Per Kit
RESISTORS
1/2- Watt
Mica (cont'd.)
20-102
1
100 pF
6-470
20-105
3
180 pF
1
47 fl (yellow-violet-black)
6-101
4
100 fl (brown-black-brown)
6-331
2
330 fl (orange-orange-brown)
Disc
6-471
2
470 fl (yellow-violet-brown)
21-33
1
3.3 pF
6-202
1
2000 fl (red-black-red)
6-472
1
4700 fl (yellow-violet-red)
21-13
1
500 pF
6-103
2
10 kfl (brown-black-orange)
21-140
4
.001 fiF
6-223
2
22 kfl (red-red-orange)
21-27
15
.005 /iF
6-473
1
47 kfl (yellow-violet-orange)
21-44
2
.005 /iF, 1.6 kV
6-104
1
100 kfl (brown-black-yellow)
21-16
1
.01 mF
6-154
1
150 kfl (brown-green-yellow)
21-31
4
.02 juF
6-224
1
220 kfl (red-red-yellow)
6-105
2
1 Mfl (brown-black-green)
6-225
1
2.2 Mfl (red-red-green)
Variable
6*335
1
3.3 MH (orange-orange-
green)
2 26-92
1
3-section
26-1 22
1
2-section
2-Watt
3 26-116
1
3-section # wide spaced
1 3-5-2
1 2.2 57 (red-red-gold)
CAPACITORS
Other Capacitors
Mica
4 23-59
1
.05 fx F tubular
25-147
1
10 ^uF electrolytic
20-130
2 12 pF
27-34
2
.2 fiF Mylar
20-77
2 24 pF
31-48
1
3-30 pF mica trimmer
44
HBATHKIT®
Page 45
KEY PART
PARTS
DESCRIPTION
No. No.
Per Kit
COILS-CHOKES
5 40-546
1
8.5 MHz trap coil
6 40-548
1
Final tank coil, 80-15 meters
7 40-549
1
Final tank coil, 10 meters
8 45-30
1
.5 mH RF choke
9 45-41
1
RF choke
10 45-53
2
Parasitic choke
CONTROLS
1 1 10-57
2
10 k£2, tab-mount
10-127
2
1 M£2, tab-mount
10-115
1
7.5 M£2, tab-mount
12 10-208
1
100 k£2 with switch arm
13 12-48
1
Dual-10 k£2 and 1 M£2
14 19-67
1
1 M£2, with switch
DIODES
57-27
5
1N2071
56-26
1
1N191 (brown-
white-brown)
56-56
1
1N4149
SWITCHES
15 60-2
1
DPDT slide
16 60-4
1
SPDT slide
17 60-22
2
DPTT slide
18 63-395
1
Rotary wafer (blue dot)
19 63-399
1
Rotary, 4 position, 2 section
20 266-1116
2
Rotary switch detent
INSULATORS
21 73-3
4
1/2" rubber grommet
22 7346
7
5/16" plastic grommet
TERMINAL STRIPS
431-62
3
3-lug (miniature)
23 431-12
2
4-lug
24 431-11
1
5-lug
25 431-45
1
6-lug
KEY PART
PARTS
DESCRIPTION
No. No.
Per Kit
SOCKETS
26 434-39
2
Octal
434-42
4
Phono
434-44
1
Pilot lamp socket
27 434-118
1
11-pin
28 440-1
1
Cap for #434-118
PLUGS-JACKS-CONNECTORS
29
260-39
2
Anode clip
30
432-38
1
Microphone cable connector
31
432-39
1
Microphone chassis
connector
32
435-1
1
Mounting ring for #438-29
33
436-4
2
3-lug jack
34
438-4
5
Phono plug
35
438-29
1
11 -pin plug
TUBES-PILOT LAMPS
NOTE: Some tubes that you receive may have the suffix A
or B, etc., following the type number. Example: 6AU6A
instead of 6AU6.
411-11
4
6AU6
411-24
2
12AT7
411-25
1
12AU7
411-59
1
OA2
411-63
1
6CL6
411-67
1
6CB6
411-75
2
6146
411-124
4
6EA8
411-128
1
6BN8
411-173
1
6GW8
411-247
2
6HS6
36 412-1
2
#47 pilot lamp
TUBE SHIELDS
37 206-68
1
9-pin, 1-3/4"
206-206
1
9-pin, 2"
206-77
1
7-pin
KEY PART
PARTS
DESCRIPTION
KEY PART
PARTS
DESCRIPTION
No. No.
Per Kit
No. No.
Per Kit
SHAFTS-PULLEYS
METAL PARTS
38 100-19
1
1-1/4" pulley, small hole
57 90-362-2
1
Cabinet bottom
39 100-458
1
1-1/4" pulley, large hole
58 90-363-2
1
Cabinet top
(red dot)
203-743-1
1
Front panel
40 453-17
1
9" shaft
200-593-1
1
Chassis
453-125
1
9-3/8" shaft
59 204-102
1
L bracket
41 453-146
1
8-1/4" tubular shaft
60 204-560
1
Support rail
42 453-147
1
11-1/4" flatted shaft
61 204-2096
2
Comb bracket
43 466-6
2
3/4" pulley
62 204-738
1
Support bracket
63 204-2256-1
1
Control bracket
BUSHINGS-COUPLINGS
64 204-793
1
Capacitor mounting bracket
65 204-737
1
Filter mounting bracket
44 455-11
3
Split bushing
66 205-493-1
1
Coil cover
45 455-15
2
Shaft collar
67 205-562
1
RF cage top plate
46 455-44
1
Nylon bushing
68 206-280
1
Center shield
47 456-4
1
Shaft coupling
69 206-281
1
Final switch shield
70 206-519
2
Switch shield
KNOBS-KNOB INSERT
71 206-351-1
72 206-352-1
1
1
Rear panel
RF cage
73 266-97
1
Switch slider
48 455-52
2
Knob insert
49 462-191
7
Small knob
50 462-218
2
Lever knob
51 462-265
1
Pushbutton
462-327
1
Large knob
DIAL PARTS
HARDWARE
52 100-1041
1
Jackson drive
#3 Hardware
53 203-744
1
Escutcheon
74 250-49
5
3-48 x 1 /4" screw
54 205-756
1
Dial drive plate
75 250-172
87
3-48 x 3/8" screw
55 446-688-1
1
Dial window
77 252-1
94
3-48 nut (3 extra)
56 464-29-10
1
Circular dial
78 254-7
174
#3 lock was her (3 extra)
KEY PART
No. No.
PARTS
Per Kit
DESCRIPTION
#4 Hardware
79 250-273
2
4-40 x 3/8" screw
80
252-15
4
4-40 x 3/16" nut
81
254-9
6
#4 lock washer
#6 Hardware
82 250-8
14
#6 x 3/8" sheet metal screw
83
250-56
12
6-32 x 1/4" screw
84
250-170
7
#6x1 /4" sheet metal screw
85
250-89
40
6-32 x 3/8" screw
86
250-276
6
6-32 x 3/8" flat head screw
87
250-284
8
(black)
#6 x 1/2" sheet metal screw
88
250-26
4
6-32 x 5/8" screw
89
250-40
2
6-32 x 1-1/2" screw
90
252-3
49
6-32 nut (2 extra)
91
252-22
9
#6 speednut
92
253-1
1
#6 flat fiber washer
93
253-2
3
#6 shoulder fiber washer
94
253-60
5
#6 flat washer
95
254-1
62
#6 lockwasher (3 extra)
96
259-1
5
#6 solder lug
97
259-6
3
#6 small solder lug
#8 Hardware
98 250-43
15
8-32 x 1/4" setscrew
99
250-72
1
8-32 x 3/4" screw
100
252-4
1
8-32 nut
101
252-28
1
8-32 knurled nut
102
253-45
2
#8 flat washer
103
254-2
1
#8 lockwasher
KEY PART
PARTS
DESCRIPTION
No.
No.
Per Kit
OTHER HARDWARE
104
252-7
8
Control nut
105
252-10
4
Speednut
106
253-10
9
Control washer
107
254-5
3
Control lockwasher
108
259-10
3
Control solder lug
109
253-36
1
Spring brass washer
110
258-1
1
Dial cord spring
111
258-5
10
Spring clip
112
255-49
4
5/16" long spacer
113
255-59
2
Black tapered spacer
MISCELLANEOUS
114
51-123
1
Output transformer
115
69-35
2
Relay
74-6
Masking tape
116
75-53
6
Nylon insert
134-253
1
Wiring harness
117
207-22
1
Cable clamp
118
253-49
2
Nylon washer
119
255-42
2
3/4" phenolic spacer
120
255-79
1
3/8" shoulder spacer tapped 6-32
121
261-9
4
Rubber foot
122
263-7
1
Felt pad
123
268-7
2
Rubber belt
349-3
1
Dial cord
124
354-5
3
Cable tie
125
404-328
1
SSB crystal filter
126
407-99
1
Meter
*ARTS PICTORIAL (cont’d.)
STEP-BY-STEP ASSEMBLY
PARTS MOUNTING
Refer to Pictorial 8-1 for the following steps.
It is important that the front edges of the chassis be in
perfect alignment. This is checked at the factory. However,
if the kit receives rough handling in shipment, this alignment
might be changed. Check the alignment of the front edges of
the chassis as directed in the following step; use care in
handling the chassis throughout the assembly of the kit.
( ) Refer to Detail 8^1 A and check to see that the front
flange of the chassis is in alignment with the front
edges of the side aprons. This can be done by placing a
ruler or other straight edge along this surface as
shown. Straighten the front flange of the chassis as
required, by carefully bending the flange.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-1 B and install a phono socket at AB.
Use 6-32 x 3/8" hardware. Position the socket as
shown.
( ) In a like manner, install phono sockets at AC, AD, and
AG. Use 6-32 x 3/8" hardware. Position each socket as
shown. Note the position of the lugs of AC.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-1 C and install a 3-lug jack at AA. Use
control lockwasher, control flat washer, and a control
nut. Position the jack as shown in Pictorial 8-1.
Detail 8-1 C
( ) Refer to Detail 8-ID and mount the 11-pin plug at
AF, using the 11-pin plug retaining ring. Position pin 1
of the plug as shown. The pin numbers are molded
into the plug.
Detail 8-1 A
1 1 - PIN PLUG
HOLD THE PLUG IN THE CHASSIS HOLE AND PLACE
ONE END OF THE RING INTO THE GROOVE OF THE
PLUG. USING A SCREWDRIVER. PRESS THE RING
INTO THE GROOVE AROUND THE PLUG.
Detail 8-ID
Page 49
, 8-32 KNURLED NUT
6-32 NUT
ft 6 LOCKWASHER
#8 FLAT WASHER
n 8 LOCKWA5HER
8-32x3/4" SCREW
5- LUG
% ✓^terminal strip
#6 LOCKWASHER
OCTAL TUBE
SOCKET
Detail 8-1 E
( ) Refer to Detail 8-1 E and install the 8-32 x 3/4° screw
at AE. Use a #8 lockwasher, an 8-32 nut, two #8 flat
washers, and an 8-32 knurled nut.
6-32x3/8" SCREW
( ) Install a 1 /2" rubber grommet at BF.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-1 F and install a 5/16" plastic
grommet at BJ from the top of the chassis.
POSITION THE SMALL
PORTION OF THE GROMMET
INTO THE CHASSIS HOLE.
BEND THE LARGE PORTION
OF THE GROMMET OVER AND
INTO THE SMALL PORTION.
PRESS IT FIRMLY INTO
PLACE.
Detail 8-1 G
) Refer to Detail 8-1 G and install an octal tube socket at
V8 with a 5-lug terminal strip at BR. Use 6-32 x 3/8"
hardware. Position the terminal strip, and the socket
keyway (indicated by an arrow), as shown in Pictorial
8 * 1 .
) In a similar manner, but without the terminal strip,
install an octal tube socket at V9. Use 6-32 x 3/8"
hardware. Position the keyway of the socket as shown
by the arrow.
Detail 8-1 F
Page 50
Refer to Pictorial 8-2 (fold-out from Page 53) for the
following steps.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-2 A and install a 100 k£2 control with
switch arm (#10-208) at P. Use a 3/8" control
lockwasher, a 3/8" control flat washer, and a 3/8-32
control nut. Position the control as shown.
Refer to Detail 8-2B for the following three steps.
( ) Install an SPDT slide switch (#60-4) at HL on the
switch bracket. Use two 6-32 x 1/4" screws.
( ) Similarly, install a DPDT slide switch (#60-2) at HN
on the switch bracket. Use two 6-32 x 1 /4" screws.
( ) Remove the clear protective backing from the felt pad.
Then press the felt pad in between the screw heads
and onto the switch bracket as shown.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-2C and place the slide switch
actuator in position on the switch bracket. The two
black switch levers must fit easily into the two slots in
the actuator. If they do not, loosen the switch
mounting screws and readjust.
Detail 8-2C
{ ) Place the switch bracket in position as shown in Detail
8-2D and secure one end to the chassis. Use a 6-32 x
3/8" black flat head screw, a #6 lockwasher, and a
6-32 nut. Do not tighten the nut at this time.
Detail 8-2B
Detail 8-2D
Page 51
( ) Refer to Detail 8-2E and swing the free end of the
switch bracket into position. The slot in the slide
switch actuator should fit over the switch actuator
arm on control P. Secure the switch bracket with a
6-32 x 3/8" black flat head screw and a threaded
shoulder spacer as shown. Securely tighten both 6-32
screws holding the switch bracket.
( ) Place a knob insert on the outer (slotted) shaft of
control P.
( ) Rotate the knob insert back and forth two or three
times to make sure the slide switches operate properly.
If, at any point in its travel, the end of the switch
actuator arm touches the chassis, loosen the control
nut and move the control away from the lower chassis
lip to clear the actuator arm. Then tighten the nut.
( ) Remove the knob insert from control P.
Refer to Detail 8-2F for the following steps.
( ) Install 5/16" plastic grommets at CA, CC, CD, and CE
on the center shield.
( ) Install 1/2" rubber grommets at CB and CF on the
center shield.
( ) Install #6 x 3/8" sheet metal screws in the center
shield at CJ, CK and CL. Position the screws as shown.
Leave 1/16" between underside of the screw heads
and the center shield.
( ) Install a comb bracket on the center shield, with 3-48
x 3/8" hardware. Position the comb bracket as shown.
Detail 8-2F
( ) Mount the center shield in the chassis with 6-32 x
3/8" hardware at BZ, BM, and BW. Do not tighten the
hardware at this time.
( ) Refer to Detail B*2G and insert a #6 x 3/8" sheet
metal screw in the final switch shield at CH. Leave
1/16" between the underside of the screw head and
the shield.
( ) Refer to the same Detail and mount the final switch
shield. Use 6-32 x 3/8" hardware and #6 x 1/2" sheet
metal screws.
Detail 8-2G
Refer to Pictorial 8-2 for the following steps.
3-48 NUT
NOTE: When the circuit boards are mounted, lockwashers
must be installed between the chassis and the foil sides of
the circuit boards. This assures a good ground between the
circuit boards and the chassis. This operation can be
simplified if you place a piece of masking tape over the
screw heads after the screws are installed on the lettered side
of the circuit board. This will hold the screws in place until
lockwashers and nuts are installed. The tape should be
removed after the nuts are installed. Mount all five circuit
boards on the chassis before tightening the hardware.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-2H and the inset of Pictorial 8-2, and
mount the IF circuit board (#85-128-4) on the
chassis. Use 3*48 x 3/8" hardware. Do not tighten the
hardware at this time.
( ) In a like manner, mount the bandpass circuit board
(#85-129*5). Use 3-48 x 3/8" hardware. Be sure to
position the circuit board properly. Do not tighten the
hardware at this time. Refer to the inset drawing on
Pictorial 8-2 for the proper installation of the
hardware that goes through the center shield.
( ) Mount the modulator circuit board (#85-127-2) using
a 3-48 x 3/8" hardware.
( ) Mount the R F driver circuit board (#85-131-6) with a
small #6 solder lug at BT. Use 3-48 x 3/8" hardware,
with a lockwasher on each side of the solder lug.
Position and bend the solder lug as shown. Do not
tighten the hardware at this time.
( ) Cut the leads of the output transformer to the lengths
indicated in Detail 8-2J. Remove 1/4" of insulation
from the end of each lead. If not already done, melt a
small amount of solder on each exposed lead end to
hold any loose strands of wire together. This
transformer will be mounted later.
MEASURE FROM WHERE
LEADS LEAVE TRANSFORMER
Detail 8-2J
NOTE: In the next step, the #6 lockwashers can be more
easily installed between the circuit board and chassis if 6-32
x 5/8" screws are taped in place first, along with the 3-48 x
3/8" hardware. Then, the 6-32 x 5/8" screws can be
removed, and the #6 lockwashers will remain in place while
the output transformer is being installed.
( ) Refer to Detail &-2K and mount the audio circuit
board (#85-1302) using 3-48 x 3/8" hardware.
( ) Place the output transformer on the audio circuit
board and pass the white, the black, and the green
leads through the hole near AH.
( ) At BA, mount a 4-lug terminal strip on the bottom
side of the chassis positioned as shown. Use 6-32 x
5/8" hardware. Note the lockwashers used.
3 Ay 'Y a O 1 ” 2 ” 3 ” 4 ” 5 ” 6 ”
I . i ... I i I i 1 i I i I * 1 , 1
Page 53
Detail 8-2K
control nut. Form the control solder lug against
terminal 1 of the control. Before soldering, check to
see that the formed lugs will fit under the chassis lip at
R. Solder lug 1 (S-1 ), and then remove the control flat
washer and control nut.
( ) Again refer to Detail B-2L and install this control and
solder lug assembly at R. Use a control washer and a
control nut. Position the lugs as shown so that lug 1
clears the screw at AJ. This insures that the control
lugs will not interfere with the rubber foot to be
installed later.
( ) On top of the chassis at AH, mount an L bracket with
the 5/8" (long) side against the circuit board under the
transformer foot. Use 6-32 x 5/8" hardware.
( ) Remove any remaining tape from the screw heads.
( ) Now tighten all the hardware of the circuit boards and
the center shield.
Refer to Detail 8-2 L for the following three steps.
( ) Insert a 6-32 x 5/8" screw into the captive nut in the
chassis lip at AJ.
( ) Prepare a 1 MO control with switch (#19-67). Place
a control solder lug on the control mounting bushing
and hold it in place with a control flat washer and a
( ) Remove the screw from AJ.
( ) Remove the switch cover (it will be reinstalled later).
( ) Refer to Detail 8-2M and install a 3-lug jack at L. Use
a control washer and a control nut. Position the jack
as shown in Pictorial B-2.
Detail 8-2M
PICTORIAL 8-2
2
o
Q
PICTORIAL 8-3
Refer to Pictorial 8-3 for the following steps.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-3A and bend down, as shown, the
four indicated lugs of the 3-section variable capacitor
(#26-92). The remaining two lugs should be left bent
up.
( ) Mount this capacitor on top of the chassis at area DB
as marked on Pictorial 8-3. Use a 6-32 x 1/4" screw, a
#6 solder lug, and a #6 shoulder fiber washer at BG
and BH . Position the solder lugs as shown in the
Pictorial. At the remaining hole, use a 6-32 x 1/4"
screw, a #6 lockwasher, and a #6 shoulder fiber
washer .
( ) Connect an ohmmeter from the chassis to one of the
three capacitor stator sections. Rotate the capacitor
through its entire range to make sure there is no
contact between the stator and the rotor plates.
Repeat this check at the other two stator sections.
Locate and repair the cause of any resistance reading
less than infinity before proceeding.
8-32 x 1/4" SETSCREW
Detail 8-3A
PICTORIAL 8-4
PIC1
Detail 8-3B
( ) Install the pulley with the small hole (#100-19) flush
with the end of the shaft of capacitor DB. Use an 8-32
x 1 /4" setscrew. Fully mesh the plates of the capacitor
and position the opening in the pulley as shown.
Refer to Detail 8-3B for the following steps.
( ) Mount a 3-section, wide-spaced, variable capacitor
(#26-116) at DC on the capacitor bracket. Use 6-32 x
1/4" screws and #6 lockwashers at each of the three
mounting holes. Bend all six solder lugs straight out
before mounting the capacitor.
( ) Mount capacitor DC and the capacitor bracket over
capacitor DB on the chassis. Use a 6-32 x 3/8" screw,
a #6 solder lug, a #6 lockwasher, and a 6-32 nut at
DF. Use 6-32 x 3/8" hardware at the other three
mounting holes.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-3C and prepare RF choke (#45-41)-
by bending the solder lug at the top to a vertical
position as shown. Be careful not to break the
connecting wire.
% vl'A o 1” 2”
111. L i 1 I I I I L.
Detail 8-3C
( ) Install the prepared RF choke at BK on top of the
chassis, with a 3-lug miniature terminal strip on the
bottom of the chassis. Use a 6-32 x 3/8" screw, #6
lockwashers, and a #6 fiber flat washer. Position the
terminal strip as shown, and place the bottom lug of
the choke over grommet BJ. Do not tighten the
mounting screw at this time.
( ) Insert a 6146 tube in socket V9, and make sure there
is at least 1/8" clearance between either solder lug of
the choke and any other metal part. Tighten the
mounting screw and remove tube V9 from its socket.
NOTE: When wiring this kit, you will be instructed to
prepare lengths of wire ahead of time, as in the next step.
When wire is called for, use the small hookup wire of the
indicated color unless other wire is specified. To prepare a
wire, cut it to the indicated length and remove 1/4" of
insulation from each end. After the insulation is removed
from the ends of the large red wire, if any of the small wire
strands are loose, twist them together and melt a small
amount of solder on the exposed wire ends.
( ) Prepare the following lengths of large red wire:
3-1/2" 3-1/2"
3" 4"
3"
3 ” 4 ” 5 ” 6 ”
_i i i i i , i
(Repeat)
Refer to Detail 8-3D for the following steps.
Connect the following lengths of large red wire to the lugs of
the final tank coil (#40*548). Only one end of each wire will
be connected at this time.
( ) 3-1 /2" to lug 1 (SI).
( ) 3" to lug 2 (S-1 ).
( ) 3” to lug 3 (S-1).
( ) 3-1/2" to lug 4 (S-1).
( ) 4" to lug 5 (S-1).
( ) Install two 3/4" phenolic spacers on the final tank
coil. Do not overtighten the spacers as the threads can
be damaged.
( ) Mount the final tank coil at DD on top of the chassis
with a three-lug miniature terminal strip at BE on the
bottom of the chassis. Use a 6-32 x 3/8" screw and
two #6 lockwashers. At the front end of the coil, use
a 6-32 x 3/8" screw and a #6 lockwasher. Position the
coil as shown with its leads in proper sequence
through grommet BF.
Detail 8-3D
Page 57
Detail 8-3E
( ) Refer to Detail 8-3E and mount relays at BB and BD.
Use a 3-48 nut and a #3 lockwasher for each.
( ) Refer to Detail B»3F and mount a 3-30 pF mica
trimmer capacitor (#31-48) on the inside of the RF
cage at DE. Use 6*32 x 1/4" hardware. Be sure to
position the tongue of the mounting bracket in the
slot.
Detail 8-3F
3 Ay 2 V4 O 1”
Detail 8-3G
( ) Pass the large red wire from the variable capacitor on
the RF driver circuit board through an adjacent hole
in the RF cage and connect this wire to the lower
contact of the trimmer capacitor (S-1 ).
( ) Refer to Detail 8-3G and mount the RF cage on the
chassis. Use six #6 x 1/2" sheet metal screws, a #6
solder lug at BC, a 6-lug terminal strip at BL, a 4-lug
terminal strip at BN, and two #6 lockwashers, all on
the bottom of the chassis. Position the solder lug and
terminal strips as shown.
( ) Position the shaft coupling on the shaft of variable
capacitor DC to see that it is centered in hole DC of
the RF cage. If it is not, loosen the capacitor bracket
hardware and make the necessary adjustments. Re-
tighten the hardware.
( ) Start two #8 x 1/4" setscrews in the shaft coupling.
( ) Close the capacitor.
( ) Position the shaft coupling with the setscrews pointing
straight up; the setscrew at the front end of the
coupling should just clear the front of the RF cage.
Tighten the rear setscrew onto the capacitor shaft.
2” 3 ,f 4 " 5”
Page 58
HARNESS WIRING
CAUTION: As you handle the chassis in the following steps,
avoid damaging the 20 /iF capacitor on the audio circuit
board.
Refer to Pictorial 8-4 (fold-out from Page 54) for the
following steps.
( ) Work a 1/2" rubber grommet into square notch CG at
the rear end of the center shield.
( ) Place a 1 " length of masking tape over each of the two
metal edges near BW and BZ at the front end of the
center shield. Also tape the metal edges at breakouts 1
and 17.
Each wiring harness wire is colored in one of the following
three ways:
1. A plain solid color such as green.
2. A solid color (usually white) with one stripe, such as
white-orange. Body color is called out first.
3. A solid color with two stripes, such as white-red-red.
Body color is called out first.
( ) Straighten out each branch of the wiring harness and
the individual wires at each "breakout." For
orientation, locate breakout #3, where three short red
wires and one white-blue (white with blue tracer) wire
leave the harness.
( ) Form the wiring harness as shown in Detail 8-4A, and
position the chassis bottom side up with the front
toward you.
ABOVE CHASSIS
Detail 8-4A
ABOVE CHASSIS
( ) Hold the formed wiring harness to the left of the
center of the chassis and start the longest wires
through the appropriate grommet in the center shield.
Then move the entire harness to the right and start the
next shorter wires through their grommet. Bend the
harness so that breakout #17 and #18 will pass
around the front end of the center shield to the
position shown in the Pictorial. Make sure the main
harness is snug against the grommets.
( ) Before proceeding, check to make sure the wires have
been correctly placed, as follows:
GROMMET
WIRES
CB
BO (breakout) #15 and #16
CC
WHT-ORG-YEL
CD
WHT-RED-RED, WHT-BLK-BLK
CE
YELand WHT-BLU
CF
BO #13
CG
RED, GRN, and WHT-GRN-GRN
To get the best performance from your transceiver, it should
be wired neatly. All insulated wires should be positioned
down against the chassis whenever possible, but should clear
screw threads and metal edges. All components should be
positioned as close as possible to the locations shown. Check
periodically with the Chassis Photos at the rear of the
Manual to see how the finished kit should appear.
Because of the many wires in the Transceiver, it is not
possible to show the hookup of every wire in one Pictorial.
Therefore, the wires not connected in the first Pictorial will
be connected in a later one.
Connect the following wires from BO#1 as directed:
( ) Gray to lug 4 of switch R (S-1 ),
( ) White-gray to lug 5 of switch R (S-1 ).
( ) White-violet to lug 1 of control P (S-1).
( ) White-yellow-yellow to lug 3 of control P (S-1 ).
Connect the remaining wires from BO#1 to the IF circuit
board as follows:
( ) Red to 10 (S-1).
( ) White-red to 9 (S-1).
( ) Brown to 8 (S-1 ).
( ) Two white-brown to 6 (S-2).
( ) Yellow to 12 (S-1).
( ) White-green to 7 (S-1 ).
( ) Place the switch wires in the notch of the switch cover
and replace the cover of switch R. Be careful not to
pinch the wires. The cover may be keyed to fit one
way only.
Connect the wires from BO#3 to the IF circuit board as
follows:
( ) Three red to 1 (S-3).
( ) White-blue to 5 (S-1).
Connect three of the wires from BO#2 to the IF circuit
board as follows:
( ) Two yellow to 13 (S-2).
Do not cut off or shorten any wires coming from the wiring
harness. Those that are too long should be doubled back ( ) White- red-red to 11 (S-1).
against themselves to take up the slack.
Connect two of the wires from BO#2 to the bandpass
circuit board as follows:
( ) Pass the following wires from BO#1 up through the
notch in the IF circuit board to the top of the chassis: ( ) White-orange-yellow to 18 (S-1).
Blue
White
White-green- green
White-red-red
( ) Red to 17 (S-1).
The two green wires and the two white-black-black wires
will be connected later.
%%% o
I i i i i i -L
2 ”
3 ”
1 ”
4 ”
5 ”
i
6 ”
J
Connect the wires from BO#4 to the bandpass circuit board
as follows:
( ) Three white-orange-yellow to 7 (S-3).
( ) Three brown to 2 (S-3).
( ) Place a 1" length of small black sleeving on the
white-gray wire and insert the wire through hole BY so
that at least 1-3/4" protrudes on the top of the circuit
board. Make any necessary adjustments in harness
positioning to insure this length. The free end of this
wire will be connected later.
Connect the wires from BO#5 to the bandpass circuit board
as follows:
( ) Green to 10 (S-1).
( ) Gray to 1 1 (S-1 ). Check the Pictorial for the correct
hole in this foil.
( ) Two white-red-red to 8 (S-2).
( ) Two brown wires to 12 (S-2).
( ) White-yellow-yellow to 9 (S-1).
Connect the wires from BO#6 to the bandpass circuit board
as follows:
( ) White to 3 (S-1).
( ) Three white-brown to 4 (S-3).
( ) One (either) red to 5 (S-1 ).
( ) One red to 6 (S-1 ).
Connect four of the wires from BO#7 to the bandpass
circuit board as follows:
( ) Two red to 15 (S-2).
( ) Black to 16 (S-1).
( ) White-brown to 13 (S-1).
Connect three of the wires from BO#7 to the audio circuit
board as follows:
( ) White-red to 19 (S-1).
( ) Two brown to 17 (put both wires in one hole) (S-2).
Connect the wires from BO#8 to the audio circuit board as
follows:
( ) Red to 14 (S-1).
( ) Two white-yellow-yellow to 18 (S-2). NOTE: The
number 18 may be partially obscured by the chassis. If
so, locate the proper holes by reference to the
surrounding wires and foils.
( ) Two brown to 13 (one hole) (S-2).
( ) Two white-brown to 12 (S-2).
Connect the wires from BO#9 to the audio circuit board as
follows:
( ) Two white-green to 5 (S-2).
( ) White-yellow-yellow to 4 (S-1).
( ) White-violet to 3 (S-1 ).
( ) Gray to 2 (S-1).
( ) White-black-black to 7 (S-1).
( ) White-orange to 1 (S-1).
NOTE: All of the wires from B0#10 will be connected to
relay BB in the following steps, single wires to some lugs and
two wires to others. Before you connect two wires to the
same lug, place a length of clear sleeving over both of them.
Place a length of small black sleeving over a single wire to a
single lug. Do not put sleeving on the bare wire. After
soldering a wire to a lug, let it cool; then push the sleeving
down over the lug.
( ) Cut eight 1/2" lengths of small black sleeving and five
1/2" lengths of clear sleeving. These will be used in the
following steps.
Refer to Inset #3 and connect the wires from B0#10 as
follows:
Page 62
OVER RELAY LUG
MAKE CONNECTIONS TO RELAY
LUCS AS SHOWN TO FACILITATE
LATER POSITIONING OF THE
SLEEVING. DO NOT WRAP WIRES
AROUND RELAY LUGS BEFORE
SOLDERING
( ) Gray to lug 14 (S-1).
( ) White-green to lug 1 2 (S-1 ).
( ) Two white-violet-violet to lug 8 (S-2).
( ) Two white-blue to lug 4 (S-2).
NOTE: When connecting wires to 11 -pin plug AF f remove
1/2" of insulation from the end of each wire, insert the wire
into the plug pin from inside the chassis, and solder it as
shown in Detail 8-4C. Be sure to note the pin numbers on
the back of the plug.
PART 2
Detail 8-4B
Refer to Pictorial 8-4 (fold-out from Page 54) and to Detail
8-4B and connect the wires from BO#10 to the relay BB as
follows:
( ) Green to lug 13 (S-1).
( ) White-blue-blue to lug 9 (S-1 ).
( ) Yellow to lug 5 (S-1).
( ) White-red to lug 1 (S-1 ).
AT THE END OF THE PIN.
Refer to Inset #1 and connect four wires from BO#10 and a
bare wire as follows:
( ) Connect a 1-1/2" small bare wire from solder lug BC
(S-1) to lug 10 (S-1).
( ) Two blue to lug 6 (S-2).
( ) Two white-yellow-yellow to lug 2 (S-2).
Refer to Inset #2 and connect the following wires from
B0#10 as follows:
Detail 8-4C
Connect wires from BO#12 to 1 1-pin plug AF as follows:
( ) Strip the insulation from the white-brown wire to a
total length of 1/2". Then connect this wire to pin 6
(S-1).
( ) Gray to pin 9 (S-1 ).
( ) White-orange to lug 11 (S-1).
White-gray to pin 10 (S-1).
( ) White-orange-orange to lug 7 (S-1 ).
( ) White-yellow-yellow to pin 1 (S-1).
( ) Two white-red-red to lug 3 (S-2).
( ) Red to pin 3 (S-1 ).
Page 63
n k: w ' r m Pt itF]
Connect the following wires from BO#12 (which were
placed through grommet CG) as follows:
( ) Place a 1/2" length of small black sleeving over the red
wire and connect it to lug 13 of relay BD (S-1). Push
the sleeving down over the lug.
( ) Connect the green wire to lug 14 of relay BD (NS).
( ) Connect the white-green-green wire to lug 3 of
terminal strip BE (NS).
Connect three of the wires from B0#1 1 as follows:
( ) Yellow to lug 1 of phono jack AC (NS).
( ) White-black to lug 3 of jack AA (NS).
( ) White-violet-violet to lug 2 of terminal strip BA (NS).
Connect the remaining wires from B0#11 to the audio
circuit board as follows:
( ) Three red to 21 (S-3).
( ) White-orange to 1 5 (S-1 ).
( ) White-orange-yellow to 16 (S-1).
( ) White-brown to 12 (S-1). There is no hole provided.
Solder the wire directly to the foil.
( ) Blue to 6 (S-1).
( ) White-green to 8 (S-1 ).
( ) White-yellow to 9 (S-1 ).
( ) Violet to 10 (S-1).
( ) Orange to 22 (S-1).
Connect the wires from BO#13 as follows:
( ) Blue to lug 3 of terminal strip BK (NS).
( ) White-brown to lug 7 of V8 (NS).
( ) Brown to lug 2 of V8 (NS).
( ) Green to lug 2 of terminal strip BR (NS).
3 4i/ 2 % o 1” 2”
I I I I I I I
( ) White-red to lug 4 of terminal strip BN (NS).
( ) White-orange-orange to lug 1 of terminal strip BN (NS).
( ) Two white-violet-violet to lug 6 of terminal strip BL (NS) .
( ) Yellow to lug 6 of terminal strip BL (NS).
( ) Make sure the wires coming from BO#1 3 are positioned
down against the chassis as shown. Also refer to the
photograph on Page 183.
Connect the wires from BO#14 to the RF driver circuit
board as follows:
( ) White-blue through grommet CE to 14 (S-1 ).
( ) Yellow through grommet CE to 1 3 (S-1 ).
( ) White-red-red through grommet CD to 11 (S-1 ).
( ) White-orange-yellow through grommet CC to 6 (S-1).
Be sure you connect to 6, and not to 9.
The white-black-black wire from grommet CD will be
connected later.
Connect the wires from BO#15 to the modulator circuit
board as follows:
( ) White-violet-violet to 9 (S-1 ).
( ) White-red to 12 (S-1).
( ) Two orange to 13 (S-2).
( ) White-brown to 11 (S-1).
( ) Brown to 10 (S-1).
Connect the wires from BO#16 to the modulator circuit
board as follows:
( ) Two yellow to 7 (S-2).
( ) Brown to 8 (S-1).
( ) Two white-yellow to 2 (S-2).
( ) Red to 1 (S-1).
The orange wire will be connected later.
3 »» 4” 5"
i , i , i . i
( ) Place all the wires from BO#18 in the notch at the
front of the modualtor circuit board and push them
up to the top of the chassis. They will be connected
later.
( ) Connect the white-violet-violet wire from BO#17 to
lug 3 of jack L (S-1).
Connect the remaining wires from BO#17 to the modulator
circuit board as follows:
( ) Two white-red to 6 (S-2).
( ) Connect one end of a 2 " black hookup wire to B on
the audio circuit board (S-1). The other end of this
wire will be connected later.
( ) Connect a 100 12 (brown-black-brown) resistor from
lug 2 (S-1 ) to lug 1 (NS) of phono socket AB.
Connect the leads from the output transformer as follows:
( ) Green to lug 1 of phono socket AB (S-2).
( ) White to lug 4 of terminal strip BA (NS).
( ) Green to 5 (S-1). ( ) Black to lug 2 of terminal strip BA (S-2).
( ) Brown to 4 (S-1).
( ) White-orange-orange to 3 (S-1 ).
The two black wires will be connected later.
CHASSIS BOTTOM-COMPONENTS AND WIRING
Refer to Pictorial 8-5 (fold-out from Page 67) for the
following steps.
( ) Prepare the following lengths of black hookup wire:
2 - 1 / 2 "
2-1/4"
2 - 1 / 2 "
4-1/2"
2 "
( ) Connect a 2-1/2" black hookup wire from lug 3 of
control R (S-1) to hole 14 on the IF circuit board
(S-1).
( ) Connect a 2-1/4" black hookup wire from GA (S-1 ) to
GB (S-1) on the bandpass circuit board. Check the
locations carefully before soldering.
( ) Connect one end of a 2-1/2" black hookup wire to 14
on the bandpass circuit board (S-1). The other end of
this wire will be connected later.
( ) Connect one end of a 4-1/2" black hookup wire to D
on the bandpass circuit board (S-1). The other end of
this wire will be connected later.
NOTE: When bare wire is called for in a step, use small bare
wire unless the large bare wire is specifically called for.
( ) Prepare the following lengths of wire:
2- 1/2" bare
3" bare
3- 1 /4" bare
1-1/4" bare
4- 1/2" black hookup
I- 1/4" large bare
8-1 /2" large red (strip one end 5/8")
3" large bare
CAUTION: Before soldering bare wires in the following
steps, make sure they do not touch any insulated wires.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-5A and connect a 2-1/2" bare wire
from lug 2 of phono socket AD (NS) to pin 2 of
II- pin plug AF (S-1).
PUSH THE WIRE INTO THE
HOLE UNTIL IT COMES OUT
OF THE END OF THE PIN
APPLY SOLDER TO THE
TIP OF THE HEATED PIN.
SOLDER WILL FLOW INTO
THE PIN BY CAPILLARY
ACTION. AFTER THE
CONNECTION HAS COOLED.
CUT OFF THE EXCESS WIRE
AT THE END OF THE PIN.
Detail 8-5A
Page 65
( ) Connect a 3" bare wire from lug 2 of phono socket
AD INS) to pin 5 of 1 1-pin plug AF (S-1 ).
( ) Connect a 3*1/4" bare wire from lug 2 of phono
socket AD (S-3) to pin 7 of 11 -pin plug AF (S-1).
( ) Connect a 1-1/4" bare wire from lug 2 of phono
socket AG (S-1) to lug 9 of relay BD (S-1).
( ) Connect a 4-1/2" black hookup wire to pin 11 of
11 -pin socket AF (S-1). Pass the other end of this
wire through grommet CG, through a 1/2" length of
small black sleeving, and connect it to lug 5 of relay
BD (S-1). After the solder cools, push the sleeving
down over the lug.
( ) Connect a 1-1/4" length of large bare wire from lug 1
of phono socket AG (S-1) to lug 12 of relay BD (S-1).
( ) Pass the 5/8" stripped end of the 8-1 /2" large red wire
through grommet CG to pin 4 of 11-pin plug AF (S-1).
Pass the other end of this wire through grommet BJ.
This end of the wire will be connected later.
NUT
( ) Pass one end of a 3" large bare wire through lug 10 of
switch BP (S-2) to lug DB3 (NS). Form the other end
so it contacts lug DB2 (S-2) and connects to lug 8 of
relay BD (NS).
NOTE: In the following step, the hardware supplied with
the switch wafer may be different from the hardware shown
in the Detail. Use only the hardware supplied with the
switch when assembling the switch wafer to the switch
detent.
Refer to Detail 8-5B for the next two steps.
( ) Remove the hardware from switch wafer #63-395 and
note the sequence in which it is removed.
( ) Assemble the rotary switch wafer to a switch detent.
Note the relationship of the color dot on the switch
wafer and the locating tab on the switch detent. Then
mount the assembly at BP, using two control flat
washers and a control nut. Place the locating tab in the
slot.
Connect the large red wires coming from grommet BF as
follows:
( ) Wire coming from lug 1 of the final tank coil DD (lug
nearest the front of the chassis) to variable capacitor
lug DB3 (S-2).
( ) Wire from lug 2 of the final tank coil to lug 11 of
switch BP (S-1 ).
( ) Wire from lug 3 of the final tank coil to lug 12 of
switch BP (S-1).
( ) Wire from lug 4 of the final tank coil to lug 1 of
switch BP (S-1).
( ) Wire from lug 5 of final tank coil to lug 2 of switch BP
(S-1).
Page 66
( ) Prepare the following lengths of wire.
BROWN
WHITE
BLACK
OTHER
3-1/2"
4-1/2"
2-3/4"
5" Red
6-1/2"
5-1/2"
2"
3/4" Bare
5"
5-1/2"
4-1/2"
( ) Connect a 3-1/2" brown hookup wire from lug 2 of
tube socket V9 (S-1) to lug 2 of tube socket V8 (NS).
( ) Connect a 6-1/2" brown hookup wire from lug 2 of
tube socket V8 (NS) to 10 on the RF driver circuit
board (S-1).
( ) Connect a 4-1/2" white hookup wire from lug 7 of
tube socket V8 (NS) to 8 on the RF driver circuit
board (S-1).
( ) Connect a 5-1/2" white hookup wire from lug 1 of
terminal strip BN (NS) to 5 on the RF driver circuit
board (S-1).
( ) Connect a 2-3/4" black hookup wire from lug 2 of
terminal strip BN (NS) to lug 5 of terminal strip BL
(NS).
( ) Connect a 2" black hookup wire between lug 4 (NS)
and tug 6 (NS) of terminal strip BL.
( ) Connect a 5" red hookup wire to 1 on the modulator
circuit board (S-1). The other end of this wire will be
connected later.
( ) Connect a 3/4" bare wire between lug 1 (S-1) and lug
2 (S-1 ) of phone jack L
( ) Refer to Detail 8-5C and mount a 10 kJ2 tab-mount
control (#10-57) at CU (ZERO ADJ) on the control
bracket. Secure the control as shown in the inset
drawing.
Similarly, mount the following controls:
( ) 10 kft (#10-57) at CT (Bias).
( ) 7.5 Mfl (#10-115) at CR (VOX Delay).
( ) 1 Mn (#10-127) at CP (VOX Sens).
( ) 1 Mfi (#10-127) at CN (Anti-Trip).
( ) Mount a #6 solder lug at CS. Use a 6-32 x 1 /4" screw,
and a 6-32 nut.
( ) Mount the control bracket at CX and CY as shown in
the Pictorial. Use a 6-32 x 3/8" flat head (black)
machine screw, a #6 lockwasher and a 6-32 nut at
each mounting hole.
O
I
1 ” 2 ” 3 ” 4 ” 5 ” 6 ”
J I I I I 4 I 4 I 4 I
( ) Connect a 5" brown hookup wire to lug 3 of control
CU (S-1 ). Place the other end of this wire up through
the notch in the IF circuit board. It will be connected
later.
( ) Connect a 5-1/2" white hookup wire to lug 2 of
control CU (S-1). Place the other end of this wire up
through the notch in the IF circuit board. It will be
connected later.
( ) Connect a 4-1/2" black hookup wire from lug 1 of
control CU (NS) to solder lug CS (NS).
( ) Connect the two green wires from BO#2 to lug 2 of
control CT (S-2).
( ) Connect two white-black-black wires from BO#2 to
lug 1 of control CT (S-2).
( ) Connect the black wire from point 1 4 on the bandpass
circuit board to lug 1 of control CR (S-1 ).
( ) Connect the black wire from D on the bandpass circuit
board to lug 2 of control CP (NS).
( ) Connect the black wire from B of the audio circuit
board to lug 1 of control CN (S-1 ).
Page 68
COAXIAL CABLE WIRING
CAUTION: The insulation on the inner lead of a coaxial
cable melts quite easily; therefore, the connections should
be soldered as quickly as possible to prevent these cables
from shorting. When soldering the shield leads, it is advisable
to use a pair of long-nose pliers as a heat sink. Grip the
shield between the connection and the cable. This will
prevent the heat from reaching the insulation of the inner
lead. A rubber band around the handles of the pliers will
keep them in place to free both hands for soldering.
Refer to Pictorial 8-6 (fold-out from Page 68) for the
following steps.
( ) Cut the following four lengths of coaxial cable and
prepare the ends as shown in Detail &6A:
One 14-1/2"
One 6"
Two 7"
( ) At one end of the 14-1/2" coaxial cable, connect the
center conductor to B (S-1 ) and the shield lead to the
ground foil at GJ (S-1 ) on the IF circuit board.
PREPARE EACH END AS SHOWN
' """ SHIELD LEAD
TAKING CARE NOT TO CUT THE VERY THIN WIRES
OF THE SHIELD LEAD, REMOVE THE OUTER INSULATION.
PEEL OFF THE FOIL AND STRAIGHTEN OUT THE
THIN WIRES OF THE SHIELD LEAD.
TWIST THE SMALL WIRES OF THE SHIELD LEAD AND
SOLDER. PUSH THE CENTER CONDUCTOR AND ITS
INSULATION DOWN INTO A DROP OF FRESH SOLDER FOR
A FEW SECONDS. THEN REMOVE 1/4" OF THE INNER
INSULATION. ENOUGH SOLDER WILL HAVE ADHERED TO
( ) At the other end of this cable, connect the center
conductor to F (S-1) and the shield lead to the ground
foil at GK (S-1 ) on the modulator circuit board.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful that the lead to GH
does not protrude beyond the face of the circuit board.
( ) Pass one end of a 6" coaxial cable through grommet
CF. Connect the center conductor to A (S-1) and the
shield lead to the ground foil at GH (S-1) on the
bandpass circuit board. The other end of the cable will
be connected later.
( ) Pass one end of a 7" coaxial cable along the chassis
under other wiring, and through the notch in the final
switch shield as shown. Connect the center conductor
to lug 4 of relay BD (NS). Put 1/2" of small black
sleeving on the shield lead and connect it to solder lug
BG (NS). The other end of this cable will be
connected later.
( ) Pass one end of a 7" coaxial cable through grommet
CC to the bandpass circuit board. Connect the center
conductor to B (S-1) and the shield lead to GG (S-1)
on the bandpass circuit board.
( ) At the other end of this 7" cable, connect the shield
lead to the center pin of tube socket V6 (S-1). The
center conductor will be connected later.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-6B and prepare a 7" coaxial cable as
shown.
( ) Pass the 1-1 /2"end of this cable through grommet CC to
the bandpass circuit board. You may apply petroleum
jelly to the cable to make it easier to pull it through
grommet CC. At the 3/4" end, connect the center con-
ductor to 12 on the RF driver circuit board (S-1). Con-
nect shield lead to the foil at GP. Solder the lead directly,
to the foil.
( ) At the 1-1/2" end, connect the center conductor to C
(S-1) and the shield lead to GF (S-1) on the bandpass
circuit board.
( ) Cut the large black sleeving to a length of 11-3/8". Put
aside a piece 1/2" long for use later. Discard any
remainder.
PICTORIAL 8-6
( ) Cut a 19", a 22-1/2", a 21-1/2", and a 24" length of
coaxial cable. Do not prepare the ends.
( ) Group the four lengths of coaxial cable together in one
hand, even the ends, and push them through the 1 1 -3/8"
large black sleeving. NOTE: You may wish to cut the
sleeving into three equal lengths so you can more easily
insert the coaxial cables. You may also use petroleum
jelly to make it easier to slide the cables into the sleev-
ing; use a cloth to clean the cables after they are in-
serted in the sleeving.
( ) Use scissors to cut out the area in the number sheet
containing the numbers 1 f 2, 3, and 4. Discard the
remainder of the sheet.
NOTE : At the time you are instructed to apply a number to
a coaxial cable, peel a strip of six numbers off the waxed
paper backing and cut the strip into two pieces of three
numbers each. Then wrap one of these strips around each
end of the cable as shown in Detail 8-6C.
In the following step, you will have to identify and mark
both ends of each cable that was placed in the large black
sleeving. To identify a cable, hold the sleeving in one hand
and pull gently on the cable while watching for movement at
the other end of the sleeving. (An ohmmeter can also be
used to identify the cables.) After each cable is identified,
mark both ends as directed in the following steps.
( ) Identify the longest (24") coaxial cable and apply #1
strips near each end.
( ) Identify and mark the other three coaxial cables as
follows:
21 - 1 / 2 " #2
22-1/2" #3
19" #4
( ) Refer to Detail 8-6D and prepare all theends of the
four coaxial cables in the large sleeving.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-6E and, at one end of the black
sleeving, adjust the coaxial cables to the lengths
shown.
( ) Form the coaxial cable assembly as shown in the
Pictorial, with the end of the black sleeving described
in the preceding step positioned between BO#5 and
BO#8. Position the other end of the sleeving as
shown.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-6F and pass cable ties (#354-5)
around the wiring harness and the coaxial cable
assembly at the three points shown in the Pictorial.
Pull each cable tie snug and clip off the excess length
of the tie.
Va % Va o 1” 2” 3” 4” 5” 6”
I . I . I . I . I . I . I . I . I I I
Connect the ends of the coaxial cables coming from the
black sleeving between BO#5 and BO#8 as follows:
( ) #1: Center conductor to C on the audio circuit
board (S-1), and the shield lead to the adjacent
ground foil as shown. (S-1 ).
( ) #2: Center conductor to lug 2 of control CN (S-1),
and the shield lead to lug 3 (S-1 ).
( ) #3: Center conductor to lug 3 of control CP (S-1)
and the shield lead to lug 1 (NS).
( ) #4: Center conductor to E on the bandpass circuit
board (S-1) and the shield lead to point GD
(S-1). Make sure the end of the shield lead does
not protrude beyond the surface of the circuit
board.
Connect the four coaxial cables coming from the other end
of the large black sleeving as follows:
( ) #1 : Center conductor to lug 2 of control R (S-1),
and shield lead to lug 1 (S-1). Loosen and
retighten the control, if necessary, to make the
connection.
( ) #2: Center conductor to E on the modulator circuit
board (S-1 ) and the shield lead to G L (S-1 ).
( ) #3: Pass the end of the cable up tp the top of the
chassis through the notch in the modulator
circuit board. This end will be connected later.
( ) #4: Center conductor to G on the modulator circuit
board (S-1 ) and the shield lead to GN (S-1 ).
COMPONENT MOUNTING-CHASSIS BOTTOM
Refer to Pictorial 8-6 for the following steps.
( ) Connect a 180 pF mica capacitor from lug 8 of switch
BP (S-1) to solder lug BH (NS).
( ) Connect a 100 pF mica capacitor from lug DB1 (NS)
to solder lug BH (NS).
( ) Connect a 24 pF mica capacitor from lug 7 of switch
BP (S-1) to solder lug BH (NS).
( ) Place a 3/4" length of black sleeving on one lead of a
180 pF mica capacitor. Connect this lead to lug 5 of
switch BP (S-1). Connect the other lead to solder lug
BH (S-4).
( ) Place a 1-1/2" length of black sleeving over a 2" length
of large bare wire. Connect this bare wire from lug 6
of switch BP (S-1 ) to lug DB1 (S-2).
( ) Connect a .02 /xF disc capacitor from lug 2 of terminal
strip BE (NS) to lug 14 of relay BD (S-2).
( ) Connect a .01 /xF disc capacitor between lugs 2 (NS)
and 3 (NS) of terminal strip BE.
( ) Connect a 330 f2 (orange-orange-brown) resistor
between lugs 1 (NS) and 2 (S-3) of terminal strip BE.
( ) Connect a 1 0 Idl (brown-black-orange) resistor from lug
1 of terminal strip BE (NS) to lug 8 of relay BD (S-2).
NOTE: In the following step, mount the diode so the
body is 3/8" above the terminal strip.
( ) Connect the lead from the banded end of a INI 91
diode (#56-26) to iug 1 (S-3) and the other lead to
lug 3 (S-3) of terminal strip BE.
( ) Connect either lead of an 8.5 MHz trap coil (#40546)
to lug 4 of relay BD (S-2). Connect the other lead to
solder lug BG (S-2).
( ) Connect a 1" length of large bare wire from lug 12
(S-1 ), through lug 8 (02) to lug 7 (S-1 ) of tube socket
V9.
( ) Connect a 3/4" length of large bare wire from lug 12
(S-1 ) to lug 8 (NS) of tube socket V8. Note that there
are two holes in each lug. Position this wire in the
lower hole (next to the body of the socket).
( ) Push a 3" length of bare wire through lugs 4 (NS) and
1 (NS) of tube socket V8 and through lug 4 (NS) to
lug 1 (NS) of tube socket V9. Place this wire in the
lower hole of the lugs.
NOTE: Do not use the .005 /xF 1.6 kV disc capacitors unless
they are specifically called for in a step.
( ) Pass one lead of a .005 fiF disc capacitor through lug 1
(S-3) to lug 6 (NS) of tube socket V9. Connect the
other lead to lug 9 (S-1 ).
( ) Connect a .005 /xF disc capacitor from lug 11 (S-1 ) to
lug 6 (NS) of tube socket V9.
( ) Connect a .005 /xF disc capacitor from lug 4 (S3) to
lug 10 (NS) of tube socket V9.
3 Ay„Y4 o 1” 2” 3” 4” 5” 6”
I.I.lJ I 1 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I I I
( ) Pass one lead of a .005 fiF disc capacitor through lug 1
(S-4) to lug 6 (NS) of tube socket V8. Connect the
other lead to lug 8 of the same tube socket (NS).
( ) Connect a .005 fx F disc capacitor from lug 6 (S-2) to
lug 1 1 (S-1 ) of tube socket V8.
( ) Connect a .005 ixF disc capacitor from lug 4 (S-2) to
lug 10 (S-1) of tube socket V8.
( ) Connect a .005 fxF disc capacitor between lugs 7 (S-3)
and 8 (NS) of tube socket V8.
( ) Connect a .005 jxF disc capacitor between lugs 2 (S-4)
and 9 (S-1 ) of tube socket V8.
( ) Connect a .005 fxF disc capacitor from lug 2 (NS) to
lug 3 (NS) of terminal strip BR.
( ) Connect one lead of a .005 fiF disc capacitor to lug 3
of terminal strip BR (S-2). Pass the other lead of this
capacitor through lug 4 (NS) to lug 5 (NS) of this
terminal strip.
( ) Connect a 220 k O (red-red-yellow) resistor from lug 3
of socket V8 (NS) to lug 3 of terminal strip BN (NS).
( ) Place a 1/2" length of small black sleeving on one lead
of a .005 ix F disc capacitor. Connect this lead to lug 4
of terminal strip BR (NS), and the other lead to lug 2
of terminal strip BN (NS).
Detail 8-6G
( ) Connect the banded end of a 1N2071 diode (#57-
27) to lug 1 of terminal strip BK (NS). Connect the
other lead to lug 1 of terminal strip BN (NS).
( ) Connect a .005 ixF disc capacitor between lugs 1 (NS)
and 3 (S-2) of terminal strip BN.
( ) Connect a .02 fiF disc capacitor between lugs 3 (NS)
and 4 (NS) of terminal strip BL.
( ) Pass the lead at the banded end of a .2 fiF Mylar
capacitor through lug 2 (NS) to lug 3 (NS) of terminal
strip BL. Connect the other lead to lug 1 (NS).
0 0
Detail 8-6H
( ) Refer to Detail 8-6H and form a 2-3/4" length of large
bare wire as shown. Connect this wire from lug 3 of
tube socket V8 (S-2) to lug 3 of tube socket V9 (S-1).
Bend the lugs out to permit the wire to enter the lugs
easily. Do not attempt to bend the wires around the
lugs.
( ) Connect a .02 fiF disc capacitor from lug 10 of tube
socket V9 (S-2) to the bare wire in the preceding step
(S-1).
( ) Connect a .001 juF disc capacitor from lug 5 of
terminal strip BL (NS) to the same bare wire (S-1 ).
( ) Refer to Detail 8-6J, and solder each lead of a .005 fxF
disc capacitor to a 150 kft (brown-green-yellow)
resistor. Cut the leads below the resistor to 3/8". Then
bend a 1/8" "foot" on each lead, as shown.
SOLDER
AND TRIM
Detail 8-6J
( ) Position this resistor-capacitor combination so one
foot is at point 11 (S-1) and the other at point GP
(S-1 ) on the RF driver circuit board.
( ) Bend a 1/8" foot on the end of one lead of a 100 kft
(brown-black-yellow) resistor and position this foot on
point 11 as in the preceding step (S-1). DO NOT
shorten the leads of this resistor. The other lead of this
resistor will be connected later.
Page 72
( ) Cut each lead of a 3.3 pF disc capacitor to 5/8". Bend
a 1/8" foot on the end of one lead and position this
foot at point GX on the RF driver circuit board (S-1 ).
The other lead of this capacitor will be connected
later.
( ) Place a 5/8" length of black sleeving on each lead of a
24 pF mica capacitor. Connect this capacitor between
points 15 (S-1) and 16 (S-1) on the modulator circuit
board.
( ) Cut each lead of a 12 pF mica capacitor to a length of
3/8", and bend a 1/8" foot on each lead. Connect this
capacitor between points 18 (S-1) and GT (S-1) on the
modulator circuit board
( ) Cut each lead of a .005 jzF disc capacitor to a length
of 3/8" and form a "foot" on each. Connect one foot
to center pin GE of VI 2 (S-1) and the other foot to
1 2 (S-1 ) on the bandpass circuit board.
( ) Cut each lead of a .001 /xF disc capacitor to 3/8"
Bend a 1 /8" foot on the end of each lead. Solder one
foot to the foil at 8 and the other lead to the foil at
GU on the bandpass circuit board.
( ) Connect the lead at the banded end of a .05 jiF
tubular capacitor to lug 4 of terminal strip BA (S-2).
Place a 1/2" length of sleeving on the other lead and
connect it to hole 20 on the audio circuit board (S-1 ).
( ) Connect the lead at the banded end of a .2 iiF Mylar
capacitor to lug 3 of jack AA (NS). Connect the other
end of this capacitor to lug 1 of terminal strip BA
(NS).
( ) Connect a 330 £2 (orange-orange-brown) resistor
between lugs 1 (S-2) and 3 (S-1) of terminal strip BA.
( ) Connect the lead at the positive (+) end of a 10 ytF
electrolytic capacitor (#25-147) to lug 2 of phono
socket AC (NS). Connect the other lead to point GC
on the audio circuit board (S-1). There is no hole at
this location.
( ) Connect a .005 fiF disc capacitor between lugs 1 (S-2)
and 2 (S-2) of socket AC.
( ) Connect a 500 pF disc capacitor between lugs 1 (S-2)
and 2 (S-2) of control CP.
( ) Pass one lead of a 2.2 M£2 (red-red-green) resistor
through lug 3 (S-2) to lug 2 (S-1) of control CR.
Connect the other lead to solder lug CS (S-2).
( ) Connect one lead of a 4700 £2 (yellow-violet-red)
resistor to lug 3 of control CT (S-1). Connect the
other lead to lug 1 of control CU (S-2).
( ) Connect the cathode end of a 1 N2071 diode (#57-
27) to lug 2 of control P (S-1 ). Connect the other lead
to 12 on the IF circuit board (S-1).
( ) Place a 5/8" length of black sleeving on each lead of
a 1N2071 diode (#57-27). Connect the cathode
lead to lug 3 of jack AA (S-3). Connect the other lead
to 16 (S-1) on the audio circuit board.
( ) Refer to Detail B-6K and place a 1/2" cable clamp
over the wiring harness and the four coaxial cables
that pass in front of the chassis center shield. Mount
the cable clamp at BX on the front of the chassis, as
shown, with 6*32 x 3/8" hardware.
Detail 8-6K
NOTE: Use 1/2 watt resistors unless the step directs
otherwise.
Detail 8-6L
Refer to Detail 8-6L for the following steps.
( ) Mount the SSB crystal filter (#404-328) on the filter
mounting bracket at FL-1. Use two small #6 solder
lugs, four #4 lockwashers, and two 4-40 nuts as shown
in the Detail.
NOTE: If you have purchased the 400 Hz CW crystal filter,
mount it to the crystal filter bracket at FL-2. Use #4
lockwashers and 4-40 nuts.
( ) Mount the crystal filter and bracket assembly at BU.
Use 6-32 x 3/8" hardware.
( ) Connect a 1-3/4" bare wire from lug 1 of crystal filter
FL-1 (S-1 ) to lug 3 of of switch EB (S-1 ).
( ) Connect a 2000 12 (red-black-red) resistor from solder
lug 2 of crystal filter FL-1 (S-1 ) to lug 2 of switch EB
(NS).
( ) Place a 3/4" length of sleeving over one lead of a .001
M F disc capacitor. Connect this lead to lug 2 of switch
EB (S-2) and connect the other lead to hole 15 on the
IF circuit board (S-1). Check the Pictorial for the
correct hole.
( ) Connect a 1-1/2" bare wire from lug 4 of crystal filter
FL-1 (S-1 ) to lug 5 of switch EC (S-1 ).
( ) Place a 1 " length of sleeving over one lead of a .001
M F capacitor. Insert this lead through grommet CA in
the center shield and connect it to hole 14 in the
modulator circuit board (S-1). Check the Pictorial for
the correct hole.
( ) Place the other lead of this capacitor through lug 6
(S-2) to lug 1 (S-1 ) of switch EC. Use a 1 /2" length of
sleeving on the lead between lugs 1 and 6.
( ) Connect a 2-1/2" bare wire from lug 3 of switch EC
(S-1 ), through solder lug 3 of crystal filter FL-1 (S-2),
to lug 4 of switch EC (S-1 ). Use a 1 " length of sleeving
on the wire between lug 3 of EC and solder lug 3.
NOTE: If you have the 400 Hz CW crystal filter installed,
perform the next two steps. If this filter is not used,
disregard the next two steps.
( ) Connect a 1" bare wire from lug 2 of crystal filter
FL-2 (S-1 ) to lug 2 of switch EC (S-1 ).
( ) Connect a 1" bare wire from lug 1 of crystal filter
FL-2 (S-1 ) to lug 1 of switch EB (S-1).
3 /ai ! 4 % o 1 ” 2 ” 3 ” 4 ” 5 ” 6 ”
I . i . i . J i I . I i I i I i 1 , I
PICTORIAL 8-7
Refer to Pictorial 8-7 for the following steps.
( ) Connect a 47 £2 (yellow-violet-black) resistor from lug
3 of t minal strip BK (NS) to the bare wire between
lug 1 of tube socket V8 and lug 4 of tube socket V9
(S-1).
( ) Connect a .02 £tF disc capacitor between lugs 2 (S-1 )
and 3 (S-3) of terminal strip BK.
( ) Connect a 100 £2 (brown-black-brown) resistor from
lug 1 of terminal strip BK (S-2) to the bare wire
between lug 3 of tube socket V8 and lug 3 of tube
socket V9 (S-1).
( ) Connect a 2.2 £2 (red-red-gold) 2 watt resistor from lug
6 of tube socket V9 (S-3) to lug 8 of tube socket V8
(S-4).
( ) Connect a 3.3 M£2 (orange-orange-green) resistor
between lugs 2 (S-3) and 4 (NS) of terminal strip BL.
( ) Connect a 22 kSl (red-red-orange) resistor between
lugs 1 (S-2) and 4 (S-4) of terminal strip BL.
( ) Connect a 47 k£2 (yellow-violet-orange) resistor
between lugs 1 (S-5) and 4 (NS) of terminal strip BN.
( ) Connect a 1 Mil (brown-black-green) resistor from lug
2 of terminal strip BR (NS) to lug 4 of terminal strip
BN (S-3).
( ) Connect a 10 kfl (brown-black-orange) resistor be-
tween lugs 2 (S-4) and 4 (S-4) of terminal strip BR.
( ) Connect a .5 mH RF choke (#45-30) between lugs 1
(NS) and 5 (S-2) of terminal strip BR.
( ) Connect the cathode lead of a 1N2071 diode to lug 3
(S-3) and the other lead to lug 5 (S-3) of terminal
strip BL.
( ) Connect the cathode lead of a 1N2071 diode to lug 2
of terminal strip BN (S-3). Connect the other lead to
lug 6 of terminal strip BL (S-5).
( ) Refer to Detail 8-7A and form a 2-7/8" large bare
wire. Connect one end of this wire to lug 5 of tube
socket V9 (S-1 ) and the other end to lug 5 of tube
socket V8 (NS). Bend the lugs out enough so that the
wire can enter the lugs without more bending.
-L. ,-L
1/2" I 1/2"
T T
Detail 8-7A
3 Ay'/4 O 1” 2” 3” 4” 5” 6”
1 . i . i . 1 i I i 1 i I i I i 1 i I
WIRING RF SECTION-CHASSIS TOP
Refer to Pictorial 8-8 for the following steps.
CAUTION: To prevent voltage flash-over, make sure that
the spacing between the bare wire in the following step and
any other undesired metal parts is greater than the spacing
between the rotor and stator plates of the capacitor.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-8 A and cut two heavy bare wires
2*1/4" long. Bend down each end of each wire 1/8".
( ) Fit one end of one wire into lug 1 (S-1 ), and the other
end into lug 3 (NS) of capacitor DC.
( ) Form lug 2 of the capacitor to touch this bare wire
(S-2).
Detail 8-8A
( ) Place 1/2" of black sleeving on one lead of a 12 pF
mica capacitor and connect this lead to lug 4 of
variable capacitor DC (S-2).
( ) Fit the remaining bare wire into lugs 4 (NS) and 6 ( ) Connect the other lead of this capacitor to the upper
(S-1 ) and to touch lug 5 (NS) of the capacitor. terminal of mica trimmer capacitor DE (S-1 ).
Page 76
I
PICTORIAL 8-8
(Repeat)
( ) Refer to Detail 8-8B and cut 5/8" from the long end
and 1/4" from the short end of the 10 meter final
tank coil (#40-549).
Detail 8-8B
NOTE: Turn the shaft of capacitor DC fully clockwise
(open) before fitting the coil in the following steps. This will
avoid the possibility of mechanical obstruction. After fitting
the coil, dose the capacitor plates again.
( ) Connect the 10 meter final tank coil from the solder
lug on coil DD (S-1) to lug 3 of capacitor DC (S-2).
Place the coil leads on the lugs and hold them securely
with the solder.
( ) Place a 1/2" length of large black sleeving (previously
prepared) over lug 1 (the lower solder lug) of the RF
Choke at BK. Connect the free end of the large red
wire coming from grommet BJ to this lug (NS).
( ) Cut each lead of a .005 /iF, 1.6 kV , disc capacitor to a
length of 5/8". Connect one lead to lug 1 of the RF
choke (S-2). Connect the other lead to solder lug DF
(S-1).
Detai
NOTE: Tube types 6146 and 6146A may be directly
interchanged.
( ) Install type 6146 tubes in tube sockets V8 and V9.
Place an anode clip on the cap of each (the appearance
of the node cl ip may vary).
( ) Refer to Detail 8-8C and form the two parasitic
chokes (#45-53) as shown. Connect one lead of a
choke to the anode clip of tube V8 (S-1), and con-
nect one lead of the other choke to the anode clip of
tube V9 (S-1).
NOTE: In the following step, if either hole of the solder lug
is filled with solder, melt it out and clear the hole before
attempting to connect the parasitic chokes.
( ) Place the other lead of the V9 parasitic choke in the
lower hole of lug 2 on top of RF choke BK (NS).
( ) Place the free lead of the V8 parasitic choke in the
upper hole of lug 2 on top of RF choke BK (NS).
( ) Connect a .005 /iF, 1.6 kV , disc capacitor from lug 2
of RF choke BK (S-3) to lug 5 of capacitor DC (S-3).
% y 2 14 O
1
1 ”
2 ”
J
Page 77
PARASITIC
CHOICE
8-8C
( ) Refer to Detail 8-8D and mount the RF cage top plate
on the RF cage. Use #6 x 1/4" sheet metal screws in
the six holes on top of the cage.
Detail 8-8D
3 ”
J
4 ”
1
5 ”
J
6 ”
J
Page 78
Refer to Pictorial 8-9 for the following steps.
END OF SC A L E
( ) Squeeze out some grease from the silicone grease pod
and apply a small amount to the gears of the VFO
tuning capacitor at the point where they meet. Rotate
the shaft several times to distribute the grease to all
the gear teeth.
( ) Remove the protective backing from the circular dial.
Then mount the dial on the drive mounting plate. Use
the 4-40 x 1/2" self-tapping screws, which were put
aside earlier, and the 5/16" long spacers.
( ) Turn the VFO shaft to its full counterclockwise
position. Then slip the circular dial with one hand
until the "500" end of the scale is at the 12 o'clock
position as shown in Detail 8-9A.
( ) Mount the VFO assembly at area BV with one spade
bolt in each of the four slots. Use #6 lockwashers and
6-32 nuts. The nuts will be tightened later. Be sure the
edge of the circular dial is positioned in the circular
notch at BZ.
Detail 8-9A
| HHATHKir]
MOUNTING PARTS-FRONT PANEL
Refer to Pictorial 8-10 for the following steps.
( ) Lay a soft cloth on the work area to prevent
scratching of the front panel. Position the panel as
shown.
( ) Mount the Jackson drive on the dial drive plate. Use
3-48 x 1/4" hardware. Remove and discard the two
small brass screws as before.
( ) Fit the escutcheon to the front of the panel with one
mounting stud in each of the four holes. Align the
openings in the escutcheon and the panel,
( ) Remove the protective strip from the dial window
(#44641-2). Fit the two holes over the upper two
escutcheon studs, and press the adhesive against the
back of the panel.
( ) Place a speednut over each of the four escutcheon
studs and press the nuts firmly against the back of the
panel.
( ) Mount this dial drive assembly on the front panel at D.
Use 4-40 x 3/8" screws in the two tapped holes. Leave
these screws finger-tight only.
NOTE: Wherever solder lugs are used on the front panel,
scrape off any excess paint around the hole on the inside of
the panel, and at the points shown on the Pictorial.
( ) Mount a 10 k£2 - 1 MO dual control (#12-48) at F.
Use a control solder lug, a control flat washer, and a
control nut. Position the control and solder lug as
shown in the Pictorial. Bend the solder lug against lug
1 (NS) and cut off the 1/4" excess.
Page 79
( ) Mount a 4-position 2-section switch (#63-399) at G.
Use a control solder lug, a control flat washer, and a
control nut. Reshape the solder lug as shown so it will
touch lug 7 of the rear wafer.
( ) Mount a DPTT slide switch at J. Use 6-32 x 3/8"
hardware .
( ) Mount a DPTT slide switch at K. Use 6-32 x 3/8"
hardware.
( ) Remove and discard the wire shorting clip from
between the lugs of the meter.
( ) Mount the meter at E, using the lockwashers and nuts
furnished with the meter. Do not overtighten the nuts.
NOTE: Before mounting the microphone chassis connector
in the following step, be sure the small screw that holds the
connector together is snug, but not too tight. Place a drop of
fingernail polish or glue over the head of this screw to keep
it from working loose.
( ) Mount the microphone chassis connector on the front
of the panel at M with only the nut supplied with the
connector. Position lug 1 as shown. Lug numbers are
molded into the connector. Tighten the nut to draw
the connector into the panel. Then, without disturbing
the connector, remove the nut. It will be reinstalled
later, together with the lockwasher.
PICTORIAL 8-1
ICTORIAL 8-10
Page 80
FRONT PANEL WIRING
Refer to Pictorial 8-1 1 for the following steps.
( ) Prepare the following lengths of hookup wire:
1- 1/4" black
2- 1/4" black
2-3/4" black
( ) Connect a 1-1/4" black wire between lugs 1 (S-2) and
6 (NS) of control F. Be sure the control solder lug is
soldered to lug 1 of the control.
( ) Connect a 2-1/4" black hookup wire to lug 4 of
control F (NS). The other end of this wire will be
connected later.
( ) Similarly, connect a 2-3/4" black hookup wire to lug 5
of control F (S-1).
NOTE: To make it easier to locate the lugs, each lug
location (hole) of the rotary switches will be given a
number, even though every hole does not have a lug. Lug
locations are numbered starting at the color dot and
proceeding clockwise (viewed from the knob end).
( ) Solder the control solder lug to lug 7 on the rear wafer
of switch G.
( ) Position the bottom edge of the front panel against
the front of the chassis. It may be necessary to prop
the top edge of the front panel up slightly to make
wiring easier.
( ) Connect the violet wire from BO#18 of the wire
harness to lug 3 of control F (S-1 ).
Connect the wires from BO#18 of the wire harness to the
front wafer (nearest the front panel) of switch G as follows:
( ) White-yellow to lug 11 (S-1).
( ) Blue to lug 9 (S-1).
( ) White-violet-violet to lug 6 (S-1).
( ) White-black to lug 3 (S-1 ).
( ) White-green to lug 1 (S-1 ).
3 Ay-Y4 O 1 ” 2 ”
I i i ■ i ■ I i I i I
( ) Connect a 5" black wire from lug 2 of control F (S-1)
to lug 4 on the front wafer of switch G (S-1 ),
( ) Green to lug 16 (S-1).
( ) White-gray to lug 18 (S-1).
( ) White-orange to lug 20 (S-1 ).
( ) White-orange-orange to lug 13 (S-1 ).
( ) White-blue-blue to lug 1 5 (S-1 ).
( ) Yellow to lug 17 (S-1).
( ) White-red to lug 19 (S-1 ).
Connect the wires from BO#18 of the wire harness to the
rear wafer of switch G as follows:
( ) White-red-red to lug 18 (S-1).
( ) Black to lug 20 (S-1).
( ) Gray to lug 3 (S-1).
( ) Prepare the following lengths of wire:
2" black
2-3/4" black
3" black
3" black
NOTE: In the following four steps, connect only one end of
each wire to the rear wafer of switch G. The free ends will
be connected later.
( ) 2" black wire to lug 12 (S-1).
( ) 2-3/4" black wire to lug 13 (S-1).
( ) 3" black wire to lug 15 (S-1).
( ) 3" black wire to lug 17 (S-1).
3 ” 4 ” 5 ” 6 ”
_j » i . i . i
PICTORIAL 8-11
Refer to Pictorial 8-1 2 for the following steps.
( ) Prepare the following lengths of hookup wire:
4" black
3-1 /2" black
2- 1/2" black
3- 1/4" brown
4" black (strip one end 1/2")
1-1/2" black (strip one end 1/2")
M/2" black
NOTE: In the following steps, if only one end of a wire is
connected, its free end will be connected later.
( ) Connect a 4" black wire to lug 1 of switch K (S-1 ).
( ) Connect a 3-1/2" black wire to lug 2 of switch K (NS).
Connect the other end of this wire to lug 1 of the
meter (S-1).
( ) Connect a 2-1/2" black wire to lug 4 of switch K (NS).
Connect the other end of this wire to lug 4 of switch J
(NS).
( ) Connect a 3-1/4" brown wire to lug 5 of switch K
(S-1).
( ) Push the 1/2" stripped end of a 4" black wire through
lug 6 (NS) to lug 7 (S-1) of switch K. Connect the
other end of this wire to lug 2 of the meter (S-1 ).
( ) Push the 1/2" stripped end of a 1-1/2" black wire
through lug 4 (S-3) to lug 8 (S-1 ) of switch J. Connect
the other end of this wire to lug 1 of switch J (NS).
( ) Connect one end of the remaining 1-1/2" black wire
to lug 1 of switch J (S-2).
Connect the wires from BO#1 as follows:
( ) Remove an additional 1/4" of insulation from the
white-red-red wire. Push this end of the wire through
lug 2 (S-2) to lug 3 (S-1 ) of switch J.
( ) Long white to lug 7 of switch J (S-1 ).
( ) White-green-green to lug 3 of switch K (S-1 ).
( ) Blue to lug 8 of switch K (S-1 ).
( ) Connect a 470 £2 (yellow-violet-brown) resistor from
lug 2 (S-2) to lug 4 (NS) of switch K.
( ) Connect a 470 £2 (yellow-violet-brown) resistor from
lug 6 (S-3) to lug 4 (S-3) of switch K.
%y 2 y< p
I I I I L i -L
1 ”
_L_
4 ” 5 ”
J i l_
i
j.
6”
J
PICTORIAL 8-12
Page 84
FRONT PANEL MOUNTING
Refer to Pictorial 8-13 (fold-out from Page 80) for the
following steps.
( ) Remove the control nuts and control flat washers
from the controls at R and P, and from jack L.
( ) Insert the pushbutton into the Zero Set hole from the
back of the panel.
( ) Tip the front panel up into place while carefully
bending the cable assemblies and wires to the switches
so the front panel will fit against the front of the
chassis. Do not pinch any wires between the front
panel and chassis. Be careful not to break the switches.
The end of the VFO shaft must enter the recess in the
Jackson drive on the panel.
( ) Replace the control nuts and control flat washers at R,
P, and L. Do not tighten the nuts at this time.
( ) Place the lockwasher and the nut (removed earlier) on
the back of the microphone connector. Do not tighten
the nut yet.
Detail 8-13A
Detail 8-1 3B
{ ) Start 6-32 x 3/8" screw, a #6 lockwasher and a 6-32
nut at each upper corner of the panel. Do not tighten
the hardware at this time.
{ ) Position the front panel so its bottom edge is even
with the bottom of the chassis. Tighten the nuts at L
and R just enough to hold it in this position.
Refer to Detail 8-1 3A for the two following steps.
{ ) Tighten the two Jackson drive mounting screws.
{ ) Start two 8-32 x 1/4" setscrews in the 2-1/2" knob.
Place the knob on the VFO shaft and tighten the two
setscrews.
{ ) Temporarily tighten one of the setscrews in the hub of
the Jackson drive back of the panel.
( ) Turn the VFO knob so the dial moves through its
range. If the dial drags on the zero set button, loosen
the screws and move the VFO farther from the panel.
{ ) Tighten both setscrews in the hub of the Jackson
drive.
{ ) Tighten the VFO mounting hardware.
{ ) Refer to Detail 8-1 3B and mount a rotary switch
detent at N with a control lockwasher, a control flat
washer, and a control nut. Be sure the locating stud is
positioned in its slot.
{ ) Tighten all panel hardware.
WIRING-CHASSIS TOP
Refer to Pictorial 8-14 (fold-out from Page 80) for the
following steps.
NOTE: In the following steps, many of the wires are
inserted from the top side of the circuit boards but the
soldering must be done on the foil (bottom) side of the
boards.
Connect each of the following wires to the designated hole
in the IF circuit board:
( ) Connect the black wire from lug 1 of switch J to hole
DG on the IF circuit board (S-1), as shown in the inset
drawing on the Pictorial. Before soldering the wire,
make sure it is connected to the ground (outside) foil
of the circuit board.
( ) Brown wire from lug 5 of switch K: Hole 26 (S-1 ).
( ) Short white wire from the notch in IF circuit board:
Hole 25 (S-1).
( ) Brown wire from notch in IF circuit board: Hole 24
(S-1).
( ) Black wire from lug 1 of switch K: Hole 23 (S-1 ).
( ) Connect the center conductor of coaxial cable #3 to
lug 4 (S2) and the shield lead to lug 6 (S-2) of control
F.
Connect each of the following black hookup wires to the
designated hole on the modulator circuit board:
( ) Wire from lug 4 of control F: Hole 26, (S-1 ).
( ) Wire from lug 5 of control F : Hole 25 (S-1 ).
Connect each of the following black hookup wires from the
rear wafer of switch G to the designated hole on the
modulator circuit board:
( ) Wire from lug 12: Hole 23 (SI).
( ) Wire from lug 13: Hole 21 (SI).
( ) Wire from lug 15: Hole 24 (SI).
( ) Wire from lug 17: Hole 22 (SI).
( ) Prepare the following lengths of hookup wire.
6" orange 1-3/4" black
1-1 /4" brown 2-1/2" black
SI /4" black SI /4" black
o 1 ” 2” 3” 4 ” 5” 6”
* i 1 i 1 ■ | 1 1 1 \ ■ \ ■ 1 ■ 1 ■ \
Page 86
( ) Connect a 6" orange wire from 27 on the modulator
circuit board (S-1 ) to the B+ terminal on the back of
the VFO chassis (S-1 ).
( ) Connect the white-gray wire coming from hole BY in
the bandpass circuit board to the Bias terminal on the
VFO chassis (S-1).
( ) Connect a 1-1/4" brown wire from the previously
unused hole at 7 on the bandpass circuit board (S-1)
to the FI L terminal on the VFO chassis (S-1 ).
( ) Connect a 3-1/4" black wire from Y on the RF driver
circuit board (S-1) to Y on the bandpass circuit board
(S-1).
( ) Connect the red lead (S-1) and the blue lead (S-1)
from the output transformer to the similarly marked
holes on the audio circuit board.
( ) Connect a 1-3/4" black wire from hole W on the audio
circuit board (S-1) to hole W on the bandpass circuit
board (S-1).
( ) Connect a 2-1 /2" black wire from hole X on the audio
circuit board (S-1) to hole X on the bandpass circuit
board (S-1).
( ) Connect a 5-1 /4" black wire to hole Z on the bandpass
circuit board (S-1). From the wire as screened on the
top of the circuit board. Pass the other end down
through hole Z on the RF driver circuit board. It will
be connected later.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-14A and prepare a 6-1/2" coaxial
cable. Assemble a phono plug to the end shown.
Detail 8-14B
( ) At the other end of this cable, insert the center
conductor in hole VFO 1 on the bandpass circuit
board. Then refer to Detail 8-1 4B and, on the foil side
of the circuit board, bend this conductor over and
solder it to the foil at G and at F.
( ) Push the shield lead of this coaxial cable through hole
VFO 2 (S-1). This is the large hole between the V and
the 2 on the circuit board.
( ) Insert the phono plug into the Output jack on the
back of the VFO chassis.
( ) Prepare the following lengths of hookup wire:
3" black
12" brown
12" white
4-1/2" white
4" brown
( ) Connect a 3" black wire between hole 27 on the IF
circuit board (S-1) (this hole has a circle around it)
and hole 3 on the bandpass circuit board (S-1 ). Be-
fore you solder, make sure this wire has entered one
of the three holes in the foil which connects to pin 2
of V5.
( ) Form a twisted pair of about three turns per inch from
a 1 2" brown and a 1 2" white wire.
PREPARE THE ENDS AS SHOWN
‘SHIELD LEAD
PLUG ON
THIS END
INSERT THE INNER LEAD THROUGH
THE PLUG AND WRAP THE SHIELD
LEAD AROUND THE PLUG.
APPLY HEAT TO THE TIP OF THE
PIN ONLY LONG ENOUGH FOR
THE SOLDER TO BE DRAWN UP
INTO THE PIN BY CAPILLARY
ACTION.
SOLDER THE SHIELD
LEAD ONTO THE PLUG.
CUT OFF EXCESS WIRE
FROM THE TIP OF THE PIN
SOLDER
Detail 8-1 4A ■
6-32x3/8" SCREW
Detail 8-14C
( ) Refer to Detail 8-14C and at one end of the twisted
pair, connect the brown wire to lug 2 (NS) and the
white wire to lug 1 (NS) of a pilot lamp socket.
( ) Connect a 4-1 / 2 " white wire to lug 1 of the pilot lamp
socket (S-2).
( ) Connect a 4 " brown wire to lug 2 of the pilot lamp
socket (S-2).
( ) Mount this pilot lamp socket at DH. Use 6-32 x 3 / 8 "
hardware.
( ) Connect the short white wire from’lug 1 of the pilot
lamp socket to hole 21 on the IF circuit board (S-1).
( ) Connect the short brown wire from lug 2 of the pilot
lamp socket to hole 22 of the IF circuit board (S-1).
( ) At the free end of the twisted pair, connect the brown
wire to lug 2 (S-1 ) and the white wire to lug 1 (S-1 ) of
pilot lamp socket FU.
( ) Install a #47 pilot lamp in each of the pilot lamp
sockets.
Refer to Pictorial 8-15 (fold-out from Page 89) for the
following steps.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-1 5A and install a nylon bushing at
DJ in the RF cage.
( ) Install a 1-1/8" diameter knob on one end of the 9"
shaft. Use an 8-32 x 1 / 4 " setscrew.
( ) Place two nylon washers on this 9" shaft, and pass the
end of the shaft through the hole at A in the front
panel.
( ) Start an 8-32 x 1/4" setscrew in a shaft collar, and
slide the shaft collar onto the 9" shaft.
( ) Slide two 3/4" diameter pulleys on this shaft. Be sure
the open sides of the pulleys are positioned as shown.
( ) Place two rubber belts over the shaft.
( ) Now, insert the end of this shaft into the nylon
bushing at DJ. With the end of the shaft flush with the
inside edge of the nylon bushing, push the shaft collar
against the inside of the front panel at A and tighten
the setscrew.
( ) Install a split bushing in the open end of the shaft
coupling installed earlier on capacitor DC.
( ) Pass one end of the 9-3/8" shaft through the hole at B
on the front panel.
( ) Start an 8-32 x 1/4" setscrew in the tapped hole of the
pulley with the large hole (red dot). Flatten the tab
inside this pulley. Then place this pulley on the 9-3/8"
shaft with the open side of the pulley as shown in the
Pictorial at DC.
( ) Insert the end of the 9-3/8" shaft into the shaft
coupling until the other end of the shaft extends
approximately 7/8" from the front of the panel.
Tighten the setscrew.
0 1” 2” 3” 4” 5” 6”
1 i I i I i I i I _i I i I
Detail 8-1 5B
Refer to Detail 8-1 5B for the following steps.
( ) Slide the rear 3/4" diameter pulley on the shaft in
hole A until it is directly in line with the pulley on the
variable capacitor mounted on the RF driver circuit
board.
( ) Solder the pulley to the shaft as shown in the inset
drawing in Detail 8-1 5B. Allow the pulley to cool
before installing the rubber belt in the next step.
( ) Install one of the rubber belts (placed on the shaft
earlier) over the lower pulley and then over the upper
pulley.
Detail 8-1 5C
( ) Remove 1/4" of insulation from only one end of a
2-1/2" white wire. Then connect this wire to lug 1
(S-1) of the remaining 2-section variable capacitor
(#26-122). Bend the lug out as before.
( ) Bend the two indicated lugs of this capacitor up tight
against the capacitor insulator.
( ) Mount this capacitor at the forward position on the
RF driver circuit board. Solder the four pins and two
lugs of the capacitor to the circuit board foil.
( ) Insert the white wire from lug 1 of this capacitor
down through hole W (about 1/8") on the circuit
board. This is the neutralizing wire and its free end is
left unconnected.
( ) Position the forward 3/4" diameter pulley so it is
directly in line with the pulley on the forward variable
capacitor on the RF driver circuit board.
( ) Rotate both the pulleys so their slots are straight up.
Solder the loose pulley to the shaft. Allow the pulley
to cool before installing the rubber belt in the next
step.
( ) Place the remaining rubber belt over the lower pulley
and then the upper pulley.
Refer to Detail 8-1 5D for the following steps.
( ) Pass the unslotted end of the 8-1/4" tubular shaft over
the shaft at B (put silicone grease on the solid shaft
first) and into the pulley as shown.
( ) Position this pulley even with the rear of the tubular
shaft, and tighten the setscrew. Do not overtighten the
setscrew, as this could bend the tubular shaft against
the inner shaft and cause them to bind.
Refer to Detail 8-1 5C for the following steps.
Refer to Detail 8-1 5E for the following steps.
( ) Prepare the dial cord with a slip-proof loop on each
end as shown in parts A and B of the detail.
( ) Hook the ends of the dial cord spring into the loops of
the dial cord as shown in part C.
( ) Position pulleys DC and DB with their openings as
shown in Detail 8-15F.
“IMPORTANT: Before you proceed with the following
steps, make sure the tuning capacitors attached to pul-
leys DB and DC are fully meshed, and that the two pulley
openings are as shown in Detail 8-1 5G. If necessary,
loosen the pulley or shaft collar setscrews, reposition the
pulleys, making sure the capacitors remain meshed, and
then retighten the setscrews.”
The following dial cord installation is done best as a
continuous operation. Therefore, read the next three steps
before you follow the instructions to familiarize yourself
with the routing shown in Details 8-1 5F and 8-1 5G.
Detail 8-15G
( ) On the dial cord, locate the point exactly opposite the
dial cord spring.
( ) Position this point (and the dial cord) behind the tab
of pulley DB. Then route both ends of the dial cord
out of the pulley as shown in Detail 8-1 5F.
( ) Route the remaining end of the dial cord loop into
pulley DC. Seat the dial cord spring around the brass
bushing of this pulley as shown in Detail 8-1 5G.
3 /4 1/ 2 %
1 ”
_L_
2 ” 3 ” 4 ” 5 ” 6 ”
J i I i I i I i I
Page 90
FINAL WIRING-CHASSIS BOTTOM
NOTE: Be extra careful when soldering to the
Switch-Boards in the following steps. The driver plate, driver
grid, and the heterodyne oscillator Switch-Boards are
mounted in these steps. Best results can be obtained if the
chassis is positioned so the foil side of the Switch-Board is
horizontal. This will keep the solder from running down the
board, and causing possible short circuits between the foils.
Do not rest the weight of the Transceiver on the dial shafts,
as this could damage the dial mechanism.
Refer to Pictorial 8-16 for the following steps. This Pictorial
has been drawn to show both sides of the driver plate
Switch-Board.
( ) Position as shown the black wire extending through
the RF driver circuit board, the orange wire from
BO#16, and the WHT-BLK-BLK wire from grommet
CD.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-1 6A and mount a comb bracket and
two #3 spring clips to the support rail with 3-48 x
3/8" hardware. Position the comb bracket and spring
clips as shown in the inset drawing. Bend the ends of
the spring clips slightly as shown.
Refer to Detail 8-1 6B for the following steps.
( ) Attach the proper end of the support rail to the rear
flange of the chassis as shown. Use 6-32 x 3/8" flat
head hardware. Tighten the hardware just enough to
hold the support rail in place, yet permit it to swing
out away from the side of the chassis.
( ) Swing the support rail out from the chassis.
Locate the driver plate Switch-Board.
( ) Make sure that the notch of the rotor and the color
dot of the switch wafer are aligned with each other.
See the inset drawing on Detail 8-1 6B and the lettered
side of the Switch-Board.
( ) Position the driver plate Switch-Board in place over
the RF driver circuit board as shown. Fit the left end
of the Switch-Board into the rear notch of the comb
bracket mounted on the center shield. Make sure the
free ends of the two coaxial cables are between the
driver plate Switch-Board and the final switch shield.
( ) Swing the support rail back into place with the right
end of the Switch-Board in the rear notch of the comb
bracket. Do not fasten the support bracket at the
front of the chassis, as it must swing out to allow the
mounting of the other Switch- Boards.
( ) Install an 8-32 x 1/4" setscrew in a 1-1/8" diameter
knob and install the knob on the round end of the
11-1/4" shaft.
NOTE: In the following step, be very careful not to break
the switches. It may be necessary to loosen the nut at BP
and adjust the switch detent for better alignment.
( ) Be sure the switch detents at N and BP are at their
fully counterclockwise positions. Then insert the end
of the shaft through the switch detent at N in the
front panel, through the switch rotor, and into the
bushing of the switch detent at BP on the final s/vitch
shield. Check to see that the shaft is not binding. If
necessary, loosen the nuts on the detents and adjust
the detents to eliminate any binding.
PICTORIAL 8-16
Detail 8 - 16 B
Page 91
1
Refer to Pictorial 8-16 for the following steps.
NOTE: Before connecting the coaxial cables in the two steps
following, carefully observe two holes at A in the same foil,
and two holes at B in another foil. Be careful not to confuse
the holes for each letter.
Connect the coaxial cable coming from relay BG to the
driver plate Switch-Board as follows:
( ) Inner lead to A (S-1) and the shield to B (S-1).
Connect the coaxial cable coming from the bandpass circuit
board to the driver plate Switch-Board as follows:
( ) Inner lead to A (S-1) and the shield to B (S-1). Bend
the switch lug near B out of the way.
( ) Pass one lead of a 180 pF mica capacitor through lug 1
of terminal strip BR (S-3) to lug 5 of tube socket V8
(S-2). Connect the other lead to 2 on the driver plate
Switch-Board (S-1 ).
NOTE: Position the driver plate Switch-Board perpendicular
to the R F driver circuit board before making the following
connections.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-16C, and connect a 3/4" bare wire
from the ground foil on the driver plate switch-board
to the ground foil on the RF driver circuit board as
shown.
( ) Connect a 1-3/4" bare wire from 3 on the driver plate
Switch-Board (S-1 ) to 3 on the RF driver circuit board
(S-1).
( ) Connect a 1-1/2" bare wire from 2 on the driver plate
Switch-Board (S-1 ) to 7 on the R F driver circuit board
(S-1).
( ) Connect a 1-1/2" bare wire from 4 on the driver plate
Switch-Board (S-1 ) to 1 on the RF driver circuit board
(S-1). Do not allow this wire to extend more than
1/8" through the lettered side of the RF driver circuit
board, as this would short circuit the variable
capacitor mounted on top of the circuit board.
% y 2 % o
\ * * ■ * ■ |
i”
_L_
2 ” 3 ”
J L-
4 ” 5 ” 6 ”
J i I i I
Refer to Pictorial 8-17 for the following steps.
( ) Remove the shaft and swing the support rail outward.
( ) Make sure the notch of the rotor and the color dot of
the switch wafer of the driver grid Switch-Board are
aligned with each other.
( ) Position the driver grid Switch-Board in front of the
R F driver circuit board as shown. Insert the left end of
the Switch-Board into the third notch from the rear of
the comb bracket that is mounted on the center
shield.
( ) Swing the support rail back into place, with the right
end of the Switch-Board in the correct notch of the
comb bracket on the support rail.
( ) Carefully install the 1 1-1/4" shaft as before.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-1 7 A, and connect a 3/4" bare wire
from the ground foil on the driver grid switch-board to
the ground foil on the RF driver circuit board as
shown.
( ) Connect a 1-3/4" bare wire from 3 on the driver grid
Switch-Board (S-1) to 4 on the RF driver circuit board
(S-1).
( ) Connect a 1-3/4" bare wire from 2 on the driver grid
Switch-Board (S-1 ) to 9 on the RF driver circuit board
(S-1).
( ) Connect a 1-1/2" bare wire from 4 on the driver grid
Switch-Board (S-1) to 2 on the RF driver circuit board
(S-1). Do not allow this wire to extend more than
1/8" through the lettered side of the RF driver circuit
board, as this would short circuit the variable
capacitor mounted on top of the circuit board.
( ) Connect the free end of the red wire, coming from 1
on the modulator circuit board, to 5 on the driver grid
Switch-Board (S-1).
Detail 8-17A
VavlVa o 1 ” 2 ” 3 ”
I ■ ■ . i ■ I i I i I , I
4 ” 5 ” 6 ”
J 1 I L I
PICTORIAL 8-17
Refer to Pictorial 8-18 for the following steps.
( ) Remove the shaft and swing the support rail outward.
( ) Position the notch in the rotor of the switch wafer on
the heterodyne oscillator Switch-Board so it is
pointing AWAY FROM the color dot on the switch
wafer. See the inset drawing and the lettered side of
the circuit board.
( ) Position the heterodyne oscillator Switch-Board over
the RF driver circuit board as shown. Insert the left
end of the Switch-Board into the second notch from
the front of the comb bracket that is mounted on the
center shield. Be sure the black wire extending from
the RF driver circuit board is positioned under this
Switch-Board as shown.
( ) Swing the support rail back into place, with the right
end of the Switch- Board in the correct notch of the
comb bracket mounted on the support rail.
( ) Carefully install the 11-1/4" long shaft as before.
( ) Connect the inner lead of the coaxial cable (that has
its shield connected to the center pin of tube socket
V6 on the RF driver circuit board) to lug 10 of the
switch wafer on the heterodyne oscillator
Switch-Board (S-1). NOTE: Lug 10 is the long, or
rotor, contact on the switch.
( ) Connect a 3/4" bare wire from 1 of the heterodyne
oscillator Switch-Board (S-1), to the ground (outside)
foil of the RF driver circuit board (S-1). Solder this
end of the wire directly to the foil. There is no hole at
this location. At this time make sure the heterodyne
oscillator Switch-Board is perpendicular to the chassis
and that the second coil from the support rail is
aligned with the large, round hole in the ground foil of
the RF driver circuit board.
( ) Connect the free end of the orange wire, coming from
BO#16 of the wire harness, to 5 on the heterodyne
oscillator Switch-Board (S-1). Position the wire as
shown.
Refer to Pictorial 8-19 (fold-out from Page 99) for the
following steps.
( ) Remove the shaft and swing the chassis support rail
outward.
3 4y_% O 1” 2”
I . I . . . I . I . I
( ) Make sure the notch on the rotor and the color dot of
the switch wafer of the crystal Switch- Board are
aligned with each other.
( ) Position the crystal Switch-Board over the chassis.
( ) Connect the free end of the black wire, extending
from hole Z in the RF driver circuit board, to 1 on the
crystal Switch-Board (S-1).
( ) Insert the left end of the crystal Switch-Board into the
front notch of the comb bracket that is mounted on
the center shield. Make sure the black wire from Z is
properly positioned.
( ) Swing the chassis rail back into place, with the right
end of the Switch-Board in the correct notch of the
comb bracket.
( ) Carefully install the 1 1-1/4" shaft as before.
( ) Make sure the lower right corner of the crystal
Switch-Board is against the solder lug at BT on the
chassis and solder the two together (S-1). Bend solder
lug BT as required to keep the Switch-Board
perpendicular to the chassis.
( ) Place a 1/2" length of clear sleeving over the ends of
the two black wires from BO#17 of the wire harness.
Connect these wires to lug 2 of connector M (S-2).
( ) Place a 1 " length of small black sleeving on one lead of
a 22 kf2 (red-red-orange) resistor. Then connect this
lead to lug 1 of connector M (S-1), and connect the
other lead to B on the modulator circuit board (S-1).
( ) Push the clear sleeving down over lug 2 of connector
M.
Refer to Detail 8-1 9A (fold-out from Page 99) for the
following steps.
( ) Remove the shaft and swing the support rail outward.
( ) Position switch shield #1 into place over the RF driver
circuit board, with the left end in the proper slot in
the comb bracket mounted on the center shield. Be
sure the small hole in the shield is positioned in the
lower right corner next to the circuit board.
3 ” 4 ” 5 ” 6 ”
I I I I I I I
PICTORIAL 8-18
Page 96
Detail 8-19B
( ) Refer to Detail 8-19B and mount the 3-lug terminal
strip on switch shield #2 as shown in the Pictorial. Use
3-48 hardware as shown in the Detail. Make sure the
terminal strip is mounted on the correct side of the
shield.
Refer to Detail 8-1 9C for the two following steps.
( ) Connect the lead at the banded end of a 1N4149
(#56-56) diode to lug 2 (S-1) and the other lead to lug
1 (NS) of a 3-lug terminal strip.
( ) Connect a 1 M£2 (brown-black-green) resistor from lug
1 (NS) to lug 3 (NS) of the 3-lug terminal strip.
( ) Position switch shield #2 into place over the RF driver
circuit board with the left end in the proper slot in the
comb bracket mounted on the center shield. Be sure
the small hole in the shield is positioned in the lower
right corner next to the circuit board.
( ) Swing the support rail back into place, with the right
end of the switch shields in the correct slots of the
comb bracket.
1N4149
1 MEG
Detail 8-19C
( ) Install the 11-1 /4" long shaft as before. Be sure that
the knob points to 3.5 and that the notches in the
rotating portions of the switch wafers are positioned
in correct relationship to the color dots on the bodies
of the switch wafers.
( ) Fit one of the two small notches in the bottom edge
of switch shield #1 so it is on top of the center pin of
tube socket V7. The bottom edge of the switch
shield should be approximately 1 /8" above the RF
driver circuit board, with the center hole of the
switch shield centered around the shaft.
( ) Solder the switch shield #1 to the center pins of tube
socket V7 (S-1).
( ) Connect a 1" bare wire from the hole in the lower
right corner of switch shield #1 (S-1) to the ground
(outside) foil of the RF driver circuit board (S-1).
Solder the end of the wire directly to the foil. There is
no hole at this location.
( ) Fit one of the small notches in the bottom edge of
switch shield #2 so it is on top of the center pin of
tube socket V6. The bottom edge of the switch
shield should be approximately 1/8" above the RF
driver circuit board, with the center hole of the
switch shield centered around the shaft.
( ) Solder the switch shield to the center pin of tube
socket V6 (S-1).
BANDED END
1 /
Detail 8-19D
Refer to Detail 8-19D for the next three steps.
( ) Connect the free end of the 100 kQ, resistor from the
RF driver circuit board to lug 1 of the 3-lug terminal
strip on switch shield #2 (NS).
( ) Connect the free lead of the 3.3 pF disc capacitor to
lug 1 of the 3-lug terminal strip (S-4).
( ) Connect the end of the white-black-black wire from
grommet CD to lug 3 of the terminal strip (S-2). Pass
this wire over the band switch shaft as shown in Detail
8-1 9A.
( ) Connect a 3/4" bare wire from the hole in the lower
right corner of switch shield #2 (S-1) to the ground
(outside) foil of the RF driver circuit board (S-1).
Solder this end of the wire directly to the foil. There is
no hole at this location. Be sure the ground foil is
used.
( ) Cut two 1/2" pieces of small black sleeving.
( ) Cut each lead of a 1 00 O (brown-black-brown) resis-
tor to 3/4" and place a 1 /2" piece of sleeving on each
resistor lead. Then form the leads as shown so the
resistor can be mounted around the end of switch
shield #2.
( ) Cut each lead of a 100 £1 (brown-black-brown) resistor
to 1 ", Connect the resistor from 5 on the driver plate
Switch-Board (S-1) to 5 on the driver grid
Switch-Board (S-1). Position this resistor around the
end of switch shield #1.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-19E and secure the front of the
support rail to the front flange of the chassis. Use 6-32
x 3/8" flat head hardware. Tighten the hardware at
the rear of this support rail. Be sure the front screw
clears the lugs of the phone jack at L.
Detail 8-19E
( ) Solder one lead of this resistor directly to the foil
marked 2 on the RF Driver circuit board. Solder the
other lead directly to the ground foil on the panel side
of switch shield #2 (there is no hole at either soldering
location).
Page 98
Refer to Detail 8-19F for
the following steps.
( ) Pull the 11-1/4"
shaft out about an
inch.
( ) Place a small amount
of silicone grease
around the shaft
holes in switch
detents BP and N.
( ) Push the shaft so the
end near the rear of
the chassis fits
through the switch
detent, but not into
the rear section of
the switch.
( ) Start an B-32 x 1/4"
setscrew in a shaft
collar.
Detail 8-19F
( ) Place a dished washer and the shaft collar over the end
of the shaft.
( ) Make sure that the notch of the rotor and color dot of
the switch wafer at BP are aligned as shown in inset
drawing #1 of Detail 8-19F.
CAUTION: In the following step, it is very easy to damage
switch BP. Be SURE the hole in the switch rotor is correctly
aligned before inserting the band switch shaft.
( ) Push the shaft in as far as possible, carefully fitting it
through the rotor switch BP.
( ) Push the shaft collar forward, depressing the dished
washer slightly against the rear of the detent, and
tighten the setscrew.
( ) With the band switch shaft still in its fully
counterclockwise position, make sure you CANNOT
see the notch in the switch rotor of the "HET OSC"
Switch-Board and that you CAN see the notches in the
rotors of the other four switch wafers. If any switch
rotor is not positioned as shown in the inset drawings
for each, correctly position the rotor before
proceeding.
( ) Make sure the lugs on the rear of the crystal switch do
not touch the lugs on the front of the heterodyne
oscillator switch.
( ) Refer again to Detail 8-19A (on the fold-out from Page
99) and solder the two switch shields to the comb brack-
ets as shown.
This completes the wiring of the Transceiver. Check it very
carefully to see that ail connections are soldered, and that
no solder bridges exist between the foils of the circuit
boards. Also see that the bare wires connected from the
driver plate and driver grid Switch-Boards to the RF driver
circuit board are not touching each other or other foils of
the circuit boards. Shake out any wire clippings or solder
splashes. Clip off the excess lengths of any bare hookup or
harness wires extending through the circuit board on either
side.
KNOB INSTALLATION
Refer to Pictorial 8-20 for the following steps.
( ) Turn all switch and control shafts fully
counterclockwise.
( ) Turn all variable capacitor shafts (extending from the
front panel) so the plates of the capacitors are fully
meshed (closed).
( ) Refer to Detail 8-20A and install knob bushings on the
tubular shafts at the Final and Filter locations.
Position each lever as indicated by the arrow on the
Pictorial and push the lever knobs on to the bushings.
Then, without pulling the lever knobs off the
bushings, remove the knob-bushing combinations from
the shafts. Press the bushings into the knobs until they
are flush with the front of the knobs. Replace both
lever knobs on the shafts.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-20A and install 1-1/8" diameter
knobs and split bushings on the small shafts at the
Final and RF Gain locations. Position the pointer on
each knob as indicated by the arrow on the Pictorial.
KNOB
Detail 8-20A
) Turn the knob at the Driver Preselector location
counterclockwise until the capacitors hit the stop and
then continue to turn the knob until the knob pointer
is at the position shown by the arrow. The belts on the
pulleys will slip to allow knob setting. This also will
assure that the capacitors are both against their stops
and will track with each other.
( ) Install the 1-1/8" diameter knobs on the remaining
front panel knob locations. Position the pointers on
the knobs as indicated by the arrows. Tighten the This completes the "Step-by-Step Assembly" section of the
setscrews. Manual. Proceed to "Control and Connector Functions."
PICTORIAL 8-20
PICTORIAL 8-19
FIGURE 1-1
FIGURE 1-2
CONTROL AND
CONNECTOR FUNCTIONS
The functions of the front panel and chassis controls are
outlined in this section. Read the following paragraphs
carefully, so you will be familiar with the operation of each
control before starting to check, align, or operate this
Transceiver. The location of the controls is shown in Figure
1-1 and Figure 1-2 (fold-out from Page 100).
FRONT PANEL FUNCTIONS
DRIVER PRESELECTOR
This control is used to peak the receiver RF amplifier and
transmitter driver tuned circuits. The adjustment can be
made in either the receive or transmit mode of operation,
and must be adjusted at each position of the BAND switch.
This adjustment should also be made when the operating
frequency is changed appreciably.
MIC/CW LEVEL
When the MODE switch is in the LSB or USB position, this
control is used to adjust the audio drive. The control has
range enough to adjust for most high impedance crystal or
dynamic microphones.
With the MODE switch in the Tune or CW position, the
carrier output level of the transmitter is adjusted with this
control.
PHONES
High impedance headphones can be connected to this jack.
When the headphone plug is inserted, the speaker volume is
reduced to a very low level.
MIC (Microphone)
A high-impedance microphone should be connected to this
socket. Provisions are made in the socket for connecting a
microphone with a push-to-talk switch.
FINAL TUNE AND LOAD
The round knob is the FINAL TUNE control. After the
MAIN TUNING control has been set to the desired
operating frequency, and the MODE switch set to the TUNE
position, this control is adjusted for maximum (Relative
Power) meter indication to tune the transmitter for
maximum output.
The lever arm is the FINAL LOAD control. It is also tuned
for a maximum (Relative Power) meter indication. At this
point, there is the best possible impedance match between
the final amplifier circuit and the antenna.
The FINAL TUNE and FINAL LOAD controls have some
interaction and must be adjusted alternately until maximum
relative power is achieved.
HEATHKIT®
101
Page 102
MODE
This switch selects the LSB, USB, or CW mode of operation
for the receive and transmit sections. In the TUNE position,
the transmitter is turned on so the driver and final RF stage
can be tuned.
BAND
In the first four positions, this switch selects the following
ranges: 3.5 to 4 MHz (80 meters); 7 MHz to 7.3 MHz (40
meters); 14 to 14.5 MHz (20 meters); and 21 to 21.5 MHz
(15 meters).
The following 500 kHz portions of the 10-meter band are
selected in the other four positions of this switch: 28.0 MHz
to 28.5 MHz, 28.5 MHz to 29.0 MHz, 29.0 MHz to 29.5
MHz, and 29.5 MHz to 30.0 MHz.
MAIN TUNING
The MAIN TUNING dial controls the frequency of the VFO
over its range of 500 kHz. The dial is scaled 0 to 500. To
read frequency directly, calibrate the dial at the closest
harmonic of the calibration oscillator. Then turn the dial to
the desired frequency. Add the dial reading in kHz to the
setting of the band switch in MHz. For example:
1. Band Switch reads: 3.5 MHz
Dial reads: 335 kHz
Approximate frequency: 3.835 MHz
or
2. Band Switch reads:
Dial reads:
Approximate frequency
ZERO SET
Pushing this button while turning the MAIN TUNING knob
locks the dial scale while the VFO frequency is being
changed. This permits the MAIN TUNING dial to be
calibrated at 100 kHz intervals.
FUNCTION
This switch selects the PTT (push-to-talk) or the VOX
(voice-operated transmit) methods of controlling the
14.0 MHz
335 kHz
14.335 MHz
Transceiver, and turns the CAL (calibration oscillator) on
and off. This switch should be in the PTT or VOX position
when the MODE switch is in the TUNE position.
In the PTT switch position, the Transceiver is changed from
receive to transmit operation by closing a push-to-talk
microphone switch, or by closing the key when set up for
CW.
In the VOX position, the Transceiver is changed from
receive to transmit operation when the operator talks into
the microphone, or when the key is closed in the CW mode.
In the CAL position, the 100 kHz crystal oscillator is turned
on to calibrate the MAIN TUNING dial at 100 kHz intervals.
The harmonics of this oscillator are easily discernible
throughout the range of the Transceiver.
FILTER
This lever switch selects the SSB crystal filter or the CW
crystal filter (when installed).
RF GAIN
The receiver sensitivity is controlled by the RF GAIN
control. This control is set at the full clockwise position for
maximum gain. In the presence of extremely strong signals
which tend to overload the receiver, or to eliminate
background noise, the gain can be reduced by turning this
control counterclockwise.
METER
See “Reading the Meter" on Page 139.
When the meter switch is in the ALC position, it causes the
meter to act as an S Meter when receiving and to indicate
ALC voltage when transmitting.
The REL PWR position indicates an uncalibrated amount of
output power.
The PLATE position causes the meter to indicate total
cathode current to the final stages.
AF GAIN
The AF GAIN control adjusts the audio output volume
when receiving.
RIGHT SIDE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
VOX SENS
The VOX SENS (Sensitivity) control adjusts the VOX relay
circuit to operate at the voice level desired by the operator.
When the operator talks into the microphone, the VOX
relay is energized and turns the transmitter on.
VOX DELAY
When the FUNCTION switch is set at VOX, this control
adjusts the "hold-in" time (length of time the trasmitter
stays on) after a spoken word or a keyed character. Proper
setting of the VOX DELAY control eliminates excessive
keying of the transmitter between words or characters.
ANTI-TRIP
The ANTI-TRIP control adjusts the VOX circuit so the
signal from the speaker will not turn on the transmitter by
feeding back into the microphone.
ZERO ADJUST
The meter ZERO ADJ control is adjusted fora zero reading
on the meter, in the receive mode of operation, with the
antenna disconnected and with the RF GAIN control turned
fully clockwise.
BIAS
This control adjusts the bias voltage on the final RF
amplifier tubes for linear operation.
TOP CHASSIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS
CARRIER NULL CONTROL (Modulator Circuit
Board)
This control balances the modulator to suppress the carrier.
CARRIER NULL CAPACITOR (Modulator Circuit
Board)
The adjustment of this capacitor completes the modulator
balance.
CAL XTAL (Bandpass Circuit Board)
This trimmer adjusts the 100 kHz oscillator to exact
frequency.
REAR APRON CONNECTIONS
CW KEY: This jack is used to connect a key or keyer to the
Transceiver. Use a phone plug having a 1/4" sleeve. Connect
the hot lead of your key to the tip of the plug and the
ground lead to the sleeve.
812: This phono socket is used to connect a speaker to the
Transceiver. It accepts a standard phono plug. The output
transformer is designed for a speaker having an impedance of
8 ohms, although other speakers from 4 to 16 ohms
impedance may be used.
ALC: Automatic level control voltage from an external
amplifier may be applied to the Transceiver through this
phono socket.
SPARE: For accessories.
GND: For safety, a low- resistance, heavy-duty ground
connection should be connected to this terminal.
PWR. and ACC The cable socket from your power supply
engages this plug.
ANTENNA: This socket is used to connect the antenna to
the Transceiver. If the Transceiver is to be used with an
amplifier or monitor scope, refer to the "Installation"
section of this Manual.
NOTE: The unoccupied hole at one edge of the rear apron is
used with the Heathkit Mobile Mount.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Before applying power to the Transceiver, complete the
preliminary checks as outlined in this section. These checks
are needed to be sure there are no short circuits or open
connections that could cause damage to the Transceiver
components.
( ) Make sure the pointer of the panel meter is at zero. If
it is not, adjust the screw in the front of the meter.
( ) Turn the following front panel controls to a fully
counterclockwise position.
DRIVER PRESELECTOR control
MIC/CW LEVEL control
MODE switch
BAND switch
RF GAIN control*
AF GAIN control
( ) Set the front panel slide switches as follows:
FUNCTION switch: PTT
METER switch: PLATE
( ) Set the following controls to a fully counterclockwise
position. Refer to Figure 1-1 (fold-out from Page 100)
to help locate the controls.
ZERO ADJ
BIAS
VOX DELAY
VOX SENS
ANTI-TRIP
CARRIER NULL control
METER CIRCUIT CHECKS
An ohmmeter will be used for the resistance checks on the
following pages. Before making the first check, the polarity
of the ohmmeter test leads will be determined. Then the test
points for the common and positive (+) leads will be called
out in each step.
( ) Set the ohmmeter to the RX1 range.
HEATHKIT*
105
( ) Check the polarity of the ohmmeter leads as follows:
Connect one ohmmeter lead to the Transceiver chassis
and the other lead to pin 1 of tube socket V9. If an
“up-scale" deflection of the Transceiver panel meter is
not obtained, reverse the ohmmeter leads. When an
“up scale" meter indication is obtained, the meter lead
connected to pin 1 of tube socket V9 should be
marked (+) positive. This lead should be used as the
positive (+) lead for the remaining checks.
NOTE: Perform the two steps in the following box. The
panel meter should read up-scale, which shows that it is
connected correctly. If the panel meter does NOT read
up-scale, the meter or meter switch circuits are incorrectly
wired (or faulty) and must be corrected before additional
tests are made.
METER
SWITCH
OHMMETER
RANGE
COMMON LEAD
POSITIVE (+)
LEAD
( ) ALC
RX1
Pin 7 of tube
socket V3 (on
IF circuit board)
Chassis
( ) RELPWR
RX1
lug 1 of terminal
strip BE
Chassis
RESISTANCE CHECKS
Refer to Figure 1-2 (fold-out from Page 100), 1-3 (fold-out
from Page 106), and 1-4 for the following resistance checks.
Complete the resistance checks listed in Charts #1, #2, and
#3. Connect the common and positive (+) ohmmeter leads
and set the switches as listed in the chart.
When more than one switch setting is given, make the
resistance check at each setting of the switch. Also, observe
the special instructions given in the NOTES column.
NOTE: If readings within 20% of the stated values are not
obtained in the following steps, refer to "In Case of
Difficulty" section on Page 144, Before doing any actual
troubleshooting, however, complete all the checks. The
resistance readings thus obtained may establish a pattern
which will make the difficulty easier to locate.
IMPORTANT: The word "Diode" in the NOTES column of
the following charts indicates that a diode is in the circuit
under test. Therefore, the measured resistance can vary due
to the forward current of the diode, and depending on the
range setting of the ohmmeter. The ohmmeter readings in
the chart were made with a Heath IM-11 VTVM. Readings
made with other ohmmeters may be considerably different.
Figure 1-4
FIGURE 1-3
POWER
PLUG
8A
ALC SPARE GND
Page 107
OHMMETER TEST POINTS
COMMON
LEAD
POSITIVE (+)
LEAD
CHART#!
Page 108
| OHMMETER TEST POINTS
COMMON
LEAD
POSITIVE (+)
LEAD
MODE
SWITCH
( ) Power plug. Pin 9
Power plug, Pin 10
TUNE
< )
a a
99
( ) Chassis
ANTENNA jack, lug 1
"
< )
PHONES jack,
contact 4
99
< )
MIC socket, lug 1
99
< )
" lug 2
99
< )
it it it
LSB, USB,
and CW
< )
RF GAIN control,
lug 2
TUNE
< )
AF GAIN control,
lug 2
a
( ) 13 on the IF
circuit board
Chassis
All
CHART
RESISTANCE
IN OHMS
NOTES
INF
0 Turn the AF GAIN
control clockwise
until a click is heard.
Make the measurement.
Then return the AF GAIN
to the full counterclock-
wise (OFF) position.
0
Closed 0 Press on contact 4
Open 100 12 to open contact for
lug 2.
1 M
0
500 k
70 k to 1 0 Varies with setting
of RF GAIN control.
25 to 1 M Varies with setting
of AF GAIN control.
5 M
I OHMMETER TEST POINTS
COMMON
LEAD
POSITIVE (+)
LEAD
( ) Chassis
Capacitor lug DB-1
( >
ii tt tt
( ) Power Plug, Pin 3
CIRCUIT
BOARD LOCATION
RF Foil
DRIVER 7
i
( >
mmnm
( >
3
( >
" 9
( >
" 4
( >
" 4
( ) Chassis
Lug 1 (Wafer BS1
of BAND switch)
( >
tt
( >
Audio 22
Circuit Board
( ) Audio Circuit
Board 22
Bandpass Circuit
Board B
This completes the "Preliminary Checks."
BAND
SWITCH
RESISTANCE
IN OHMS
3.5 and 7.0 10 k
14.0 through 29.5 INF
3.5 I 100
100
7.0 through 29.5
3.5 I 1000
1000
7.0 through 29.5 I INF
3.5 I 5200
7.0 through 29.5 I INF
3.5 I 30 k
All positions I 100
Page 110
COIL COVER AND
TUBE INSTALLATION
Refer to Pictorial 8-21 for the following steps.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-2 1 A and install four pairs of spring clips
on the under side of the coil cover. Use 3-48 x 3/8"
hardware. Bend the clip ends down slightly as shown in
the insert drawing. Make sure the clips still touch each
other after bending.
CAUTION: Be sure that none of the lugs of the switch wafers
mounted on the circuit boards extend beyond the edges of the
circuit boards so they cannot short-circuit when the coil cover
is in place.
( ) As shown in the Pictorial, push the plain edge of the
coil cover under the support rail in such a manner that
the spring clips on the under side of the coil cover will
engage the metal switch shield. The slots in the two
lips of the coil cover will fit under the heads of the
four sheet metal screws in the center shield and final
switch shield.
( ) Tighten the four sheet metal screws.
Refer to Figure 1 -3 (fold-out from Page 1 06) for the follow-
ing three steps.
{ ) Connect the common lead of your ohm meter to the
chassis and check the resistance to pin 3 of the power
plug. A resistance reading under 25 kSl indicates that
the coil cover is touching one or more of the switch
lugs. This condition must be corrected before turning
on the Transceiver.
( ) Check the resistance between pin 4 of the power plug
and the chassis. It should be infinity (°°).
( ) Remove the common lead of the ohmmeter from the
chassis and connect it to pin 1 of the power plug. The
minimum resistance to the chassis should be 13 k!2.
If resistances are below those shown, refer to the "In Case of
Difficulty" section, or otherwise correct the trouble.
Place the tube shields on loose tubes as follows:
NOTE: You will install the three tube shields in the following
steps. If a tube shield is too loose, remove it from the tube,
squeeze on it to reduce its diameter, and then reinstall it.
( ) Refer to Detail 8-21 B and scrape each tube shield as
shown (away from the over lap). Then apply a thin coat
of solder to the scraped area. When you install these
shields, be sure that the ground clip of the tube socket
contacts the soldered area of the shield.
{ ) 7-pin tube shield on a 6CB6 tube (for V6).
( ) 9-pin tube shield (2" long) on a 6CL6 (for V7).
( ) 9-pin tube shield (1-3/4" long) on a 6EA8 (for VI ).
( ) Install all of the tubes in their sockets , as identified on the
circuit boards as shown in Figure 1-2 (fold-out from
Page 100). Make sure the socket ground clip contacts
the soldered area.
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTIONS
The Transceiver was designed to operate with the Heath-
kit Models HP-13 (12 Vdc power source) and HP/PS-23
(117 Vac power source) Power Supplies. The following
information will help you wire the 1 1 -pin socket (supplied
with the Transceiver) for the power cable of the Power
Supply you intend to use. The same cable and powei
supplies can be used with many other Heathkit models
Be sure to use the correct low B + voltage for each model.
HP-13 SERIES POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
CAUTION: Be sure the alternate connection in the low
voltage dc circuit of the HP-13 Power Supply is connected
for +300 volts output as outlined in the HP- 13 Manual. Be
sure the automobile voltage regulator is set to less than
14.5 volts. NOTE: If you use a different power supply, be
certain that it is correctly fused for use with this Trans-
ceiver.
NOTE: If the Heathkit Mobile Mount is used, complete the
power supply connections as directed in that manual.
112
(
Refer to Figure 1-5 for the following steps.
( ) Install the 11-pin socket cap over the free end of the
8-wire cable from the Power Supply, as shown.
( ) Remove 3/4" of the outer insulation from the end of
the 8-wire cable. Then remove 1/4" of insulation from
the end of each wire.
( ) Melt a small amount of solder on each of the exposed
wire ends to hold the small strands of wire together.
( ) Insert the lead from the cap end of the fuse-holder (an
in-line fuseholder with lead is supplied with the power
supply) through the socket cap as shown.
Page 113
) Cut seven 5/8" lengths of clear sleeving and slip them
over the indicated wires.
( ) Connect the wires of the frwire cable and the
fuseholder lead to the 11 -pin socket lugs as shown.
Solder each connection.
( ) Push the lengths of sleeving over the lugs of the
socket.
( ) Snap the socket cap onto the 11 -pin socket.
IMPORTANT: When using the HP-13 Power Supply
with the Transceiver, be sure the Bias control of the
power supply is in its fully clockwise position. This
setting will supply a maximum bias voltage at pin 9 of
the power socket.
POWER SUPPLY CABLE.
TAKING CARE NOT TO CUT THE
INNER LEADS, REMOVE THE OUTER
INSULATION OF THE CABLE.
>IN SOCKET CAP
3 / 4 “
CLEAR SLEEVING *"j
crnV
k-1/4"
8- WIRE
CABL
LUGS
— 1 B I A S ( - 1 30 VDC)
2 GND (FIL AND
^ CONTROL RELAY)
— 3 LV ( + 3 00 VDC)
>— — 4 HV ( + 800 VDC)
5 NO CONNECTION
— 6 FIL ( + 12 VDC)
— 7 GND (B- AND BIAS)'
8 NO CONNECTION
— 9 S W ( + 1 2 VDC TO CONTROL RELAY)
-10 SW ( + 12 VDC SOURCE)
NO CONNECTION
TO +12 DC SOURCE
INNER LEAD
PUSH SLEEVING
OVER LUG
Figure 1-5
HP/PS-23 SERIES POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
CAUTION: Be sure the low voltage dc circuit of the HP-23A
Power Supplies are switched for 300 Vdc output. In the
HP-23B, HP-23C, and PS-23 Power Supply, make the internal
connections for 300 Vdc output.
Refer to Figure 1-6 for the following steps.
( ) Install the 11 -pin socket cap over the free end of the
8-wire cable from the Power Supply.
( ) Remove 3/4" of the outer insulation from the end of the
8-wire cable. Then remove 1 /4" of insulation from the end
of each wire.
( ) Melt a small amount of solder on each of the exposed
wire ends to hold the small strands of wire together.
For the SB-201 and other linear amplifiers, use a piece of
coaxial cable through the cap to bring out the relay connec-
tions.
( ) Cut seven 5/8" lengths of clear sleeving and slip them
over the indicated wires.
( ) Connect the wires of the 8-wire cable and the coaxial
cable (if a linear amplifier is used) to the 1 1-pin socket
lugs as shown. Solder each connection.
( ) Push the lengths of sleeving over the lugs of the
socket.
( ) Snap the socket cap onto the 1 1-pin socket. Be careful
not to pinch any wires.
NOTE: With the above connections, the BIAS control in the
HP-23 Power Supply is inoperative. Proper bias settings are
accomplished with the BIAS control in the Transceiver.
POWER SUPPLY CABLE
. 3/4"
TAKING CARE NOT TO CUT THE
INNER LEADS, REMOVE THE OUTER
INSULATION OF THE CABLE.
TO N.O. RELAY CONNECTOR
OR AMPLIFIER ANTENNA
RELAY (OPTIONAL).
CLEAR SLEEVING
GRN
BL K
♦j *-1/4”
YELr£
SHI E LDa
: red jyTTI
- I - 1 30 V (BIAS)
- 2 F I L. COMMON
- 3 L V ( + 300 VDC)
4 HV ( + 800 VDC)
- 5 GND (RELAY)
WHTt;
6 12.6V F I L
3>— — 7 GND (B- AND BIAS)
“ 8 NO CONNECTION
BRN^
blu^:
NNE R LEAD-
POWER SWITCH
RELAY IN. O.l
PUSH SLEEVING
ON OVER LUG.
Figure 1-6
MICROPHONE CONNECTIONS
A high-impedance microphone equipped with a push-to-tal k
switch should be used with the Transceiver so either the PTT
or VOX methods may be used to turn on the Transmitter. A
two-pin microphone connector (Amphenol 80MC2M) is
furnished for this purpose. It should be connected to the
microphone cable as directed in the following steps.
Heath Microphones
( ) Determine the desired length of your microphone
cable, and cut off any excess.
( ) Perform the numbered steps in Figure 1-7.
Other Microphones
If you use a microphone different than the one shown,
connect the lead from the microphone element to pin 1 of
the connector. If the microphone has a PTT switch, connect
this lead to pin 2. Shield wires, to complete the ground side
of the circuit, should be soldered to the spring as shown in
Figure 1-7.
SHIELD AUDIO SWITCH
5. SLIP THE HOUSING AND SPRING ON THE CABLE.
6. BENO THE BARE END OF THE GROUND LEAD AND THE SHIELD
BACK OVER THE SPRING AND SOLDER.
SOLDER SWITCH
SOLDER AUDIO
(SHIELD) LEAD
7. PUSH THE AUDIO LEAD THROUGH PIN 1 AND THE SWITCH
LEAD THROUGH PIN 2 OF THE CONNECTOR BASE (NOTE
NUMBERS INSIDE OF CONNECTOR BASE).
8. SOLDER BOTH PINS ON THE END, THEN CUT OFF THE EXCESS WIRE.
9. SLIP THE HOUSING OVER THE CONNECTOR BASE AND FASTEN
WITH A SETSCREW. FASTEN THE SPRING WITH THE OTHER SETSCREW.
Pina iro 1 i
HEATHKIT
115
INITIAL TEST
CAUTION: BEFORE APPLYING POWER TO THE
TRANSCEIVER, NOTE THAT LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT BOTH ABOVE AND BELOW THE CHASSIS.
DO NOT TOUCH ANY HIGH VOLTAGE POINTS WITH
YOUR HANDS. USE WELL INSULATED TOOLS FOR
ANY ADJUSTMENTS ON THE CHASSIS.
TO LESSEN THE SHOCK HAZARD, CONNECT A LEAD
FROM A GOOD EARTH GROUND TO THE GROUND
TERMINAL LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE CHASSIS
AND TO ALL TEST EQUIPMENT.
( ) Set the front panel controls as follows:
FINAL TUNE (round knob) to 10 o'clock.
FINAL LOAD (lever knob) to 4 o'clock.
MODE LSB.
FUNCTION PTT.
METER PLATE.
RF GAIN fully clockwise.
AFGAIN PWR OFF.
( ) Connect the power supply to the proper power source
and set its switch at ON.
( ) Connect an 8 12 speaker to the 8 12 socket at the rear
of the Transceiver. CAUTION: Never operate the
Transceiver unless a speaker or headphones are
connected. For safety reasons, it is recommended that
headphones NOT be used during the testing of the
Transceiver.
If abnormal operation is encountered at any time during the
following tests, turn the Transceiver off immediately, and
refer to the "In Case of Difficulty" section of the Manual on
Page 144.
( ) Turn the AF GAIN clockwise until a click is heard.
The Receiver is now On, and the pilot lamps should
light.
( ) Visually check all parts for any signs of overheating,
and check to see that each tube filament glows. The
panel meter should indicate zero.
( ) Turn the AF GAIN control clockwise until noise is
heard from the speaker. NOTE: If no noise is heard,
check to be sure the transmitter is not keyed by a
depressed switch on a PTT microphone, a closed key,
or the MODE switch being in TUNE position.
( ) Turn the AF GAIN control to the 9 o'clock position.
( ) Set the remaining front panel controls fully
counterclockwise.
Check the voltages listed in the next two steps with a
voltmeter. Refer to Figure 1-3 (fold-out from Page 106) for
the location of test points.
( ) Set the BIAS control (on the right side of the chassis)
fully counterclockwise.
+275 volts dc from point 5 on the bandpass circuit
board to chassis ground.
(
Connect the socket on the power supply cable to the ( ) -108 volts dc (bias) from point 4 on the audio circuit
Transceiver power plug. board to chassis ground.
117
ALIGNMENT
The coils and transformers in your Transceiver have been
preset at the factory. Only minor readjustments should be
necessary during the following alignment procedure.
The following equipment is necessary for alignment of the
Transceiver.
1. A test meter, such as an 11 megohm input voltmeter.
(Vacuum tube and solid-state models are found in the
Heath catalog.) A 20,000 ohm-per-volt VOM may be
used, but will load the circuits to a greater extent.
2. A 50 £2 nonreactive dummy load that is capable of
100 watts dissipation, such as the Heathkit Cantenna.
Do not use light bulbs for a dummy load as they
present an impedance which varies with power and
frequency.
3. A receiver capable of receiving WWV at 2.5, 5, 10, or
15 MHz. If this type of receiver is not available, a
receiver tunable to a standard broadcast station which
is operating at an even multiple of 100 kHz (such as
600 kHz, 1000 kHz, etc.) can be used.
4. An accurate 100 kHz standard oscillator may be used
for the alignment of tuned circuits. DO NOT use such
an oscillator to adjust the Transceiver crystal
calibrator. For this purpose refer to the “Crystal
Calibrator Alignment" section of this Manual.
For the alignment of the transmitter section it is
recommended that you use an oscilloscope, such as the
Heathkit Signal Monitor Scope to observe the output RF
envelope.
WARNING: Do not place the Transceiver in the transmit
mode of operation until directed to do so or the Transceiver
may be seriously damaged.
( ) Connect a 50 12 dummy load, capable of 100 watts
dissipation, to the ANTENNA jack on the rear of the
chassis. CAUTION: Do not use light bulbs as a dummy
load .
( ) Be sure an 8 £2 speaker is connected to the 8 £2 jack on
the rear of the chassis.
( ) Preset the CAL XTAL trimmer so its notch is towards
the 100 kHz crystal as shown in Figure 1-2 (fold-out
from Page 100).
( ) Preset the front panel controls as follows:
DRIVER PRESELECTOR - 12 o'clock position.
MIC/CW LEVEL — fully counterclockwise.
MODE - LSB.
BAND - 3.5.
MAIN TUNING Dial (VFO) - 200.
FUNCTION - PTT.
RF GAIN — fully clockwise.
METER - ALC.
AF GAIN — 9 o'clock position.
S METER ADJUSTMENT
( ) Adjust the ZERO ADJ control (on the right side of
the chassis) for a zero indication on the meter with the
antenna disconnected and the RF GAIN control at the
full clockwise position.
119
RECEIVER ALIGNMENT
( ) Set the test meter switches so the meter will indicate a
negative (-) dc voltage.
( ) Connect the common lead of the test meter (11
megohm input voltmeter) to the chassis and the other
lead to the circuit board foil at TP (Figure 1-2) on the
screened side of the bandpass circuit board near tube
VI 9. If your meter reads 0 at TP, contact instead the
adjacent lead of the 100 k£2 (brown-black-yellow)
resistor. A reading of -.82 V or higher is normal.
The heterodyne oscillator output will be checked at each
position of the BAND switch in the following steps. If
necessary, the heterodyne oscillator coils will be adjusted to
obtain a preliminary output voltage reading. Final
adjustment will be made later. Carefully insert the slim end
of the alignment tool fully into each slug before turning, to
avoid core breakage.
NOTE: The heterodyne oscillator crystals that are supplied
with the Transceiver provide coverage from 3.5 to 4.0 MHz,
7.0 to 7.3 MHz, 14.0 to 14.5 MHz, 21.0 to 21.5 MHz, and
28.0 to 30.0 MHz. As the driver grid and driver plate coils
must be sequence-tuned (because of their series-parallel
arrangement) other heterodyne crystals for out-of-band
operation could introduce a wide variety of possible tuning
conditions. Therefore, we recommend that you do not use
crystals of frequencies other than those supplied.
It is not abnormal to receive "birdies" in the vicinity of
3740 kHz and 21,200 kHz.
( ) With the BAND switch at 3.5, the test meter should
indicate about -0.5 to -2 volts dc. If necessary, adjust
coil 3.5 (near tube VII on the top side of the RF
driver circuit board) to bring the voltage into this
range. NOTE: When adjusting this coil in one
direction, the oscillator output voltage will change
rapidly; when adjusting the coil in the opposite
direction from the peak, the output voltage will
change slowly. Adjust the coil in the direction that
gives the slower change in output voltage.
( ) Similarly, check the heterodyne oscillator output
voltage at all positions of the BAND switch. If
necessary, adjust the correct heterodyne oscillator coil
for any BAND switch position that does not give an
indication of about -0.5 to -2 volts dc on the test
meter. The heterodyne oscillator coils for bands 3.5,
14, and 28.5 are marked, and adjusted at the top side
of the RF driver circuit board; the coils for the other
bands are marked on the shield cover, and are adjusted
from the bottom of the chassis.
( ) Turn both VFO trimmer capacitor screws (through
two holes on the left side of the VFO chassis)
clockwise until just snug. Then turn each capacitor
screw counterclockwise one-quarter turn.
( ) Set the FUNCTION switch to CAL and the BAND
switch to 3.5; then turn the MAIN TUNING dial back
and forth around 400 to get a calibrator signal. Check
for the calibrate signal by turning the FUNCTION
switch to VOX and back to CAL; the signal should
stop and then start again and should peak with the
DRIVER PRESELECTOR.
( ) Reset the DRIVER PRESELECTOR to the 1 2 o'clock
position.
( ) Disconnect the test meter leads from the Transceiver.
The S Meter will be used as an output indicator during the
remaining alignment of the Transceiver and the 100 kHz
calibrator will be used as a signal source.
When adjusting the transformers in the following steps, use
the large end of the tuning tool for the top core. Use the
long, thin end (which is inserted through the top core) for
the bottom core.
CAUTION: The 6.8 MHz trap coil is sealed, and should not
be turned.
NOTE: It should not be necessary to turn the cores of
transformers T201 and T103 more than two turns.
( ) Adjust transformer T201 for maximum volume.
( ) Adjust the top and bottom slugs of transformer T102
for a maximum volume or S Meter indication.
( ) Turn the slug of transformer T103 up (GCW) 14 turns.
Then adjust it for a maximum S Meter reading (no more
than about one turn).
( ) Readjust transformers T201 , T1 02, and T1 03 slightly for
maximum S Meter reading.
VFO ALIGNMENT
( ) Make sure the Transceiver has been warmed up for at
least 30 minutes before making the following
adjustments.
NOTE: Refer to Reading the Dial on Page 139.
( ) Find the CAL signal within approximately 25 kHz of
3900 kHz (400 on the dial). A general coverage
receiver tuned to 5100 kHz will aid in identifying the
VFO signal. If you are receiving a CAL signal, it will
cease when the Function switch is set at VOX.
( ) Find the CAL signal near 4000 kHz (500 on the dial).
Then carefully turn the dial to its counterclockwise
stop. Hold the VFO knob with one hand and. with the
other hand, slip the circular dial until the end of the
scale marked “Stop” coincides with the hairline at
the “500” end. See Detail 8-9A on Page 78.
( ) Again tune in the 4000 kHz CAL signal near 500 on
the dial.
( ) Carefully tune off the 4000 kHz CAL signal to the
side toward the 500 dial reading. Then adjust the VFO
COIL to move the CAL signal to your listening
frequency. By alternately moving your listening
frequency and then adjusting the VFO COIL, you can
"walk" the CAL signal in the desired direction until it
coincides with the 500 dial reading.
( ) Turn the dial to the vicinity of 0 and identify the
3500 kHz CAL signal. Move this signal so that it
coincides with the 0 dial reading by adjusting both
VFO TRIMMERS.
Page 121
( ) As the two preceding adjustments interact to some
extent, repeat them until the 3500 kHz and 4000 kHz
CAL signals coincide respectively with the 0 and 500
marks on the dial.
NOTE: The VFO signal may be tuned in on a general
coverage receiver at 5000 kHz for the "500" dial setting,
and at 5500 kHz for the "0" dial setting.
DRIVER GRID AND PLATE COILS
The driver grid and driver plate coils will be adjusted in the
following steps. The coil locations are marked on the shield
cover on the bottom of the chassis. These coils must be
adjusted in the proper sequence as follows:
( ) Set the MAIN TUNING dial to 200, and the DRIVER
PRESELECTOR to the 12 o'clock position.
( ) Adjust driver grid coil 3.5 and driver plate coil 3.5 for
a maximum S Meter indication. The S Meter will move
slowly during the adjustment of these two coils.
( ) Change the setting of the front panel controls as
follows:
DRIVER PRESELECTOR - 29.2 position. See the
inset drawing on Figure 1-3 (fold-out from Page 106).
BAND - 29.0.
MAIN TUNING dial (VFO) - 200 kHz.
( ) Turn the MAIN TUNING dial back and forth around
29.2 MHz to get the loudest signal. Check for the
calibrate signal by turning the DRIVER
PRESELECTOR to make sure there is a variation in
volume. Return the DRIVER PRESELECTOR to the
29.2 position.
( ) Adjust driver grid coil 29 and driver plate coil 29 for a
maximum S Meter indication.
Page 122
( ) Change the setting of the front panel controls as
follows:
DRIVER PRESELECTOR - 21.2 position. See the
inset drawing on Figure 1-3.
BAND — 21.0
MAIN TUNING dial - 200 kHz
NOTE: In the following step, the CAL signal and the VFO
harmonic will be found very close together, showing that the
VFO is correctly calibrated. The CAL signal is much
stronger and can be identified by switching the FUNCTION
switch between CAL and VOX.
( ) Turn the MAIN TUNING dial back and forth around
21.2 MHz for the loudest signal.
( ) Adjust driver grid coil 21 and driver plate coil 21 for a
maximum S Meter indication.
( ) Turn the BAND switch to 14.0, the MAIN TUNING
dial to 200 kHz, and the DRIVER PRESELECTOR to
the 14.2 position.
( ) Tune the MAIN TUNING dial for the loudest signal
and check for the calibrate signal.
( ) Adjust driver grid coil 14 and driver plate coil 14 for a
maximum S Meter indication.
() Set the BAND switch at 7.0 and the MAIN TUNING
dial at 200 kHz.
( ) Tune the MAIN TUNING dial for the loudest signal.
( ) Adjust driver grid coil 7 and driver plate coil 7 for a
maximum S Meter indication.
( ) Set the FUNCTION switch to PTT.
Proper receiver operation will be indicated by minimum
calibrator signals of S9 +20 dB at 3700 kHz and decreasing
to S3 at 29.2 MHz.
TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT
See the "Reading the Meter" section on Page 139 before
making any more adjustments.
CAUTION: The coil cover MUST be in place for proper
transmitter operation.
( ) Connect a push-to-talk microphone to the MIC
connector on the front panel.
( ) If a Monitor Scope is available, connect it between the
ANTENNA jack and the dummy load. Be sure the
dummy load is capable of 100 watts dissipation. Do
not use light bulbs for a dummy load, as damage may
result.
( ) Turn the adjusting screw of the NEUTRALIZING
CAPACITOR (through the hole in the front of the RF
Cage) clockwise until resistance is felt. Then turn
the screw counterclockwise one full turn.
( ) Set the front panel controls as follows:
DRIVER PRESELECTOR — 12 o'clock position.
MIC/CW LEVEL — fully counterclockwise.
FINAL (round knob) - to 10 o'clock.
FINAL (lever knob) — to 4 o'clock.
MODE - LSB.
BAND - 3.5.
MAIN TUNING dial - 200 kHz.
FUNCTION - PTT.
METER - PLATE.
( ) Press the microphone button and turn the BIAS
control (on the right side) of the Transceiver to set the
meter needle at the ▼ mark (above the Figure 3) on
the meter scale. This sets the resting cathode current.
Do not press the microphone button more than a few
seconds at one time until this resting cathode current
has been properly adjusted.
( ) Set the METER switch to REL PWR and press the
microphone button. The meter needle should show 0.
Page 123
( ) Set the MODE switch at the TUNE position and
slowly turn the MIC/CW LEVEL control in a
clockwise direction until there is an indication of RF
output on the meter or oscilloscope.
( ) Adjust the DRIVER PRESELECTOR control for
maximum RF output.
( ) Adjust the FINAL tune (round knob) control for
maximum RF output.
( ) Adjust the MIC/CW LEVEL control for an RF output
of not more than S-3.
( ) Turn the slug of transformer T1 up (CCW) 14 turns.
Then adjust it for a maximum RF output (no more than
about one turn).
( ) Again reduce the MIC/CW LEVEL for a low meter
indication and again adjust Transformer T1 for
maximum output.
( ) Turn the MIC/CW LEVEL control and DRIVER
PRESELECTOR control to obtain maximum RF
output on the meter or oscilloscope.
( ) Place the MODE switch at LSB. Leave the MIC/CW
LEVEL control at it present setting.
NOTE: The long step following accomplishes the
preliminary neutralizing adjustment. Read this step
thoroughly and visualize what the step requires. When you
perform the adjustments, have the Transceiver at full power
output for the minimum time necessary. Then place the
MODE switch at LSB and let the final stage tubes cool for at
least 30 seconds before turning the Transceiver on again.
( ) Set the METER switch to the PLATE position.
( ) Turn the MODE switch to TUNE.
( ) Adjust the FINAL tune control for minimum plate
current. Set the METER switch to REL PWR or
observe the output on a monitor scope. Then adjust
the FINAL tune control for maximum meter
indication and note the position of the control. If
maximum relative power and minimum plate current
do not occur at the same point of tuning, turn the
neutralizing capacitor a small amount. Check the
position of the FINAL tune control at minimum plate
current and also at the maximum relative power
indication. The neutralizing capacitor should be
adjusted a small amount at a time until minimum plate
current and maximum relative power occur at the
same point of tuning the FINAL tune control.
( ) Turn the MIC/CW LEVEL control fully
counterclockwise.
( ) Turn the MODE switch to LSB, push the microphone
button, and adjust the CARRIER NULL control for
minimum RF output. Note that the smaller end of the
nut starter fits the shaft of this control.
( ) Adjust the CARRIER NULL capacitor for minimum
RF output.
( ) Turn the MODE switch to USB and, with the
microphone button pressed in, adjust the CARRIER
NULL control for minimum RF output.
( ) Adjust the CARRIER NULL capacitor for minimum
RF output.
( ) Repeat the adjustments of the CARRIER NULL
control, and the CARRIER NULL capacitor until the
RF output or null reading is about the same on both
the LSB and USB positions of the MODE switch. A
receiver with an S Meter can be used for the carrier
null indication, and it is usually more sensitive for this
purpose.
NOTE: An 11 Mf2 input voltmeter with an RF probe can
also be used at this time, if one is available, to obtain
additional accuracy in the carrier null adjustments. To null
the carrier in this manner, measure the RF voltage with the
RF probe at lug 1 (the center conductor) of the ANTENNA
connector. Then adjust the CARRIER NULL control and
CARRIER NULL capacitor for the lowest RF voltage,
which should be 1 /4 volt or less.
( ) Turn the MODE switch to TUNE and set the METER
switch at the REL PWR position.
( ) Adjust the DRIVER PRESELECTOR and the FINAL
TUNE and LOAD controls for maximum output.
Then adjust the MIC/CW LEVEL control for a reading
between 3 and 9 on the panel meter.
( ) Adjust heterodyne oscillator coil 3.5 for maximum
output, with the tuning on the "slow" side of the
peak.
( ) Repeat the two preceding steps for each position of
the BAND switch, except adjust the HET OSC coil
that has the same number as the BAND switch
position.
Page 1 24
( ) Set the BAND switch at 21.0 and turn the MAIN
TUNING dial to read 21.2 MHz.
( ) Adjust the DRIVER PRESELECTOR control and the
FINAL TUNE and LOAD controls for maximum RF
output; then turn the DRIVER PRESELECTOR
control back and forth to see if this produces a
smooth peaking in RF output.
( ) If turning the DRIVER PRESELECTOR control
causes ragged changes in the RF output, readjust the
position of, or bend, the free end of the driver
neutralizing wire to produce a smooth peaking in RF
output (this is the white, insulated wire inserted in
hole W of the RF Driver circuit board, as shown in
Figure 1-2, fold-out from Page 100).
( ) Set the BAND switch to 14.0 MHz and the MAIN
TUNING dial to 14.2 MHz. As you did before on the
3.5 MHz band, peak the DRIVER PRESELECTOR
and FINAL controls for maximum output. Compare
the control settings at which maximum relative power
output and minimum plate current occur. Again adjust
the neutralizing capacitor until these points coincide.
This completes the neutralization.
( ) Rezero the ALC position of the S Meter while
receiving, with the BAND switch at 29.5. Then check
to be sure the meter reads zero in each BAND switch
position. If the S Meter does not read zero on any
band, readjust the heterodyne oscillator coil for that
band, as directed in previous steps.
NOTE: The S Meter may rest below zero while you are
transmitting. This condition is normal.
CRYSTAL CALIBRATOR ALIGNMENT
In the following steps, the 100 kHz crystal calibrator signal
is adjusted by "zero beating" it against the accurate signal
from WWV on another receiver, or against the signal from a
standard broadcast station that is on a multiple of 100 kHz.
Zero beat will occur when a harmonic of the 100 kHz
crystal calibrator signal corresponds to the frequency of the
station tuned in on the external receiver. As zero beat is
approached, a tone will be heard that decreases in frequency
until it stops completely at the zero beat point; then the
tone begins to increase again as the dial is turned.
If the external receiver has an S Meter, accurate alignment
can be achiever by observing the S Meter as zero beat is
approached. When you tune close to zero beat, the S Meter
will start to pulsate. The closer you approach zero beat, the
slower the pulsations will become. At zero beat the
pulsations will stop. Use a "fast" AVC position, if one is
available.
IMPORTANT: For greatest accuracy, be sure to adjust the
crystal calibrator as close to zero beat as possible. A 20 Hz
error at the 100 kHz calibrator frequency, for example,
would cause a 740 Hz error at 3.7 MHz (where the 37th
harmonic of 100 kHz would be used for dial calibration
purposes; 100 kHz x 37 = 3.7 MHz; 20 Hz x 37 = 740 Hz).
In view of this, it is recommended that the crystal calibrator
be adjusted to the 1 5 MHz signal of station WWV.
( ) Connect a random length of wire from the antenna
connection of the external receiver to the ANTENNA
connection of the Transceiver. If necessary, use one of
the phono plugs furnished. It can be removed later.
( ) Set the Transceiver controls as follows:
FUNCTION switch - CAL.
AF GAIN control — full counterclockwise.
MODE switch - CW, LSB, or USB.
( ) Tune the external receiver to WWV, or a standard
broadcast station transmitting at a frequency which is
a multiple of 100 kHz.
( ) Carefully adjust the CAL XTAL trimmer capacitor (on
the bandpass circuit board) for a "zero beat" in the
external receiver. When WWV is tuned in, the period
when no tone modulation is present allows the zero
beat to be more easily heard.
( ) Switch the Transceiver FUNCTION switch to VOX
and return it to CAL to be sure the external receiver S
Meter stays steady, thus insuring a true zero beat.
( ) Remove the external receiver antenna wire from the
ANTENNA jack on the Transceiver.
)
Page 125
NOTE: To make sure it is heard on each band, a high (
content of harmonic energy is needed in the 100 kHz
calibrate signal. Because of this, some spurious signals may
also appear when tuning across some segments of the bands.
The desired 100 kHz calibrate signals are easily identified by
their greater signal strength. Also, the proper harmonics may
be peaked by the DRIVER PRESELECTOR.
VFO SHIFTER ADJUSTMENT
Carefully zero beat the calibrator signal. Use the
MAIN TUNING dial and peak the DRIVER
PRESELECTOR control.
( ) Set the MODE switch to LSB. Be careful not to touch
the MAIN TUNING dial. Note that the calibrator
signal may or may not be exactly at zero beat in the
LSB position.
( ) Adjust the MAIN TUNING dial to 200 kHz and the
BAND switch to 3.5.
( ) Set the FUNCTION switch to CAL.
{ ) Turn the MODE switch to USB.
( ) Turn the SHIFT ADJUST on the VFO for an exact
zero beat in the LSB mode. See Figure 1-2 (fold-out
from Page 100).
( ) Recheck the zero beat in the USB mode to be certain
of the adjustment. Repeat the procedure, if necessary.
DIAL CALIBRATION
NOTE: The instructions in this section use the 0 mark on
the MAIN TUNING dial as the dial calibration point. The
same instructions also apply at any 100 kHz marking.
( ) Set the BAND switch at 3.5 and the MAIN TUNING
dial at 0 kHz. Zero beat the crystal calibrator signal at
3.5 MHz. If the 0 mark on the dial is not behind the
index line in the dial window, proceed with the
following steps.
( ) Note which way you turn the dial, and move the 0 on
the dial behind the index mark in the dial window.
( ) Push the ZERO SET button to lock the dial in place,
and turn the dial knob in the opposite direction to
bring the calibrate signal into zero beat at the 0 mark
on the dial. Release the ZERO SET button.
( ) Check the accuracy of the adjustment and repeat the
above steps, if necessary.
This completes the alignment of your Transceiver.
NOTE: To verify that the VFO is operating on the proper
frequency, tune in a signal of known frequency, such as time
station CHU on 7335 kHz. This station is operated by the
Dominion Observatory, Canada.
IMPORTANT
To avoid serious damage to the final amplifier
tubes, DO NOT operate the transmitter until you
have read and completely understand the tune-
up procedure as outlined on Pages 140 through
143.
CABINET INSTALLATION
Figure 1-8
Refer to Figure 1-8 for the following steps.
( ) Position the rear panel on your table or bench as
shown, being sure to have square openings EC and ED
to your left.
( ) Remove the backing from the red Danger Label and
press the label firmly into position between holes EK
and EL.
( ) In a like manner, mount the blue and white
identification label on the rear panel as shown. NOTE:
Refer to the numbers on the blue and white label in
any communications with the Heath Company about
this kit; this will assure you the most complete and
up-to-date information in return.
( ) Push nylon inserts into square openings EA, EB, EC,
ED, EE, and EF.
HEATHKIT®
127
Refer to Figure 1-9 for the following steps.
( ) Mount a #6 speednut on the angle bracket at AH.
Position the curved lip of the speednut toward the
audio transformer.
( ) Mount the rear panel on the chassis. Use #6 x 3/8”
sheet metal screws at EG, EH, EJ, EK, and EL.
Refer to Figure 1-10 for the following steps.
( ) If a mobile mount is to be used, mount 5/16”
grommets in holes ET and EU in the cabinet top.
( ) Install #6 speednuts on the cabinet bottom at EN, EP,
ER, ES, and at the four corresponding holes on the
opposite lip of the cabinet bottom. Be sure the curved
lip of each speednut is on the inside of the lip.
( ) Place the chassis into the cabinet bottom so that the
front panel is against the lips upon which the
speednuts are mounted. Be sure the five control access
holes are on the right side.
( ) Fit the cabinet top over the chassis. The lips on the
rear will be just outside the nylon inserts on the rear
panel.
Page 129
Figure 1-10
( ) Attach the cabinet top to the rear panel. Use #6 x
3/8" sheet metal screws at EA, EB, EC, ED, EE, and
EF.
( ) Attach the cabinet top to the cabinet bottom. Use
6-32 x 3/8" screws at EN, EP, ER, ES, and the four
corresponding holes on the opposite side of the
cabinet.
Refer to Figure 1-11 for the following steps.
( ) Install plastic spacers and rubber feet at the front
corners on the bottom of the cabinet. Use a plastic
spacer, a rubber foot, a#6 flat washer, and a 6-32 x
1-1/2" screw at each corner.
( ) Install a rubber foot at each rear corner of the bottom
of the cabinet with a #6 flat washer, and a 6-32 x
5/8" screw.
This completes the assembly of your Transceiver.
INSTALLATION
Be sure to allow for adequate heat dissipation from the
Transceiver. Do not obstruct air passage through the unit by
placing other equipment, papers, or objects under or on top
of the Transceiver.
FIXED STATION INSTALLATION
Figure 1-12 shows a typical fixed station hookup. A Monitor
Scope is shown that may be used with the Transceiver. The
Transceiver may also be used with a linear amplifier;
however, the linear amplifier is shown separately in Figure
1-14 for clarity.
Cables can be prepared following the instructions in Figure
1-13. Make the cables to the lengths required for your
installation.
PREPARE EACH END A5 SHOWN
SHIELD LEAD
INSERT THE INNER LEAD THROUGH
THE PLUG AND WRAP THE SHIELD
LEAD AROUND THE PLUG.
APPLY HEAT TO THE TIP OF THE
PIN ONLY LONG ENOUGH FOR THE
SOLDER TO BE DRAWN UP INTO
THE PIN BY CAPILLARY ACTION.
SOLDER THE SHIELD
LEAD ONTO THE PLUG.
CUT OFF EXCESS WIRE
FROM THE TIP OF THE
SOLDER
Fiaure 1-13
HBATHKIT®
131
HW-101 TRANSCEIVER
Figure 1-14
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONSIDERATIONS
Heath Amplifiers
Figures 1-14 and 1-15 show typical installations using Heath
amplifiers. These linear amplifiers provide ALC voltage for
the exciter, and both have internal transmit- receiver relays.
They do not normally require a swamping pad for the input.
Other Linear Amplifiers
Information regarding antenna switching, cutoff bias, and
ALC should be obtained from the Linear Amplifier
Instruction Manual.
ANTENNA RELAY CONNECTIONS
Many amplifiers have an internal transmit-receive relay
which is actuated by grounding the relay coil circuit. Heath
amplifiers are of this type. This Transceiver has relay
contacts available to operate the relay. The connection may
be made by a shielded cable (or other two-conductor wire)
connected to the power cable socket as shown in the “Power
Supply Connections’’ section of this Manual. Another, and pos-
sibly more convenient, method is to install a jumper wire from
pin 1 1 of the power plug to the spare phono socket, both on the
chassis rear apron. To install the jumper, strip 1 /2" of insulation
from a hookup wire, melt the solder in pin 1 1 of the power plug,
and insert the bare end of the added wire into the pin from the
back side of the plug. Then solder the free end of the wire to lug
1 of phono socket AD (illustrated in Pictorial 8-5). The relay
contacts are rated at 3 amperes maximum at 30 Vdc or 120
Vac.
T-Pad
If the output power of the Transceiver is too high for the
drive requirements of the linear amplifier (not applicable to
Heath equipment), a swamping T-pad must be used between
the two units. Such a pad is shown in Figure 1-16. This pad
will provide 10 dB attenuation with a terminal impedance of
50 ohms. This will allow adequate driving power for a linear
amplifier that requires 10 watts input.
HW -101 TRANSCEIVER
Page 1 33
ANTENNA
<S>
<S>
ANT
Resistors R1, R2, and R3 in Figure 1-16 can be made from
combinations of common 2-watt, carbon resistors wired into
a metal box with phono-type jacks or connectors. NOTE:
Do not use wire-wound resistors; the resistors in the T-pad
must be a noninductive type.
Combinations of 2-watt, 10%, carbon resistors for a pad
suitable for SSB service at reduced power levels, are listed
below. WARNING: Steady full level carrier excitation
should be avoided except for very brief test periods, since
the dissipation rating of the resistors will be exceeded.
son
INPUT
son
OUTPUT
Figure 1-16
R1 = thirteen 330 12, 2-watt carbon resistors in parallel.
R2 = two 47 12, 2-watt carbon resistors in parallel.
R3 = eight 270 12, 2-watt carbon resistors in parallel.
MOBILE INSTALLATION
Page 1 34
CAUTION: Be sure the voltage regulator of the automobile
is set in accordance with the manual for your dc power
supply. Have the regulator adjusted at a competent garage.
MOBILE ANTENNAS
Mount the antenna according to the manufacturer's
instructions. Make a good ground connection between the
shield of the coaxial cable and the car body at the antenna
base. Eliminate any coating between two adjacent metal
surfaces which can add resistance to the ground connections.
Be sure the antenna is grounded to large metal areas of the
car body and NOT to small panels which may be isolated by
paint or rubber from the metal mass of the body.
Mobile antennas present loading situations which must be
carefully handled for each band. Because whip antennas
must be kept short for mobile use, they represent only a
fraction of a wavelength on the lower frequency bands.
Their radiation resistance is extremely low and their
reactance is capacitive. Therefore, loading coils must be used
and the losses kept low to insure a minimum loss of radiated
power in the form of heat in the loss resistances.
A good quality antenna will have low resistance losses, and
with a high "Q" loading coil, its bandwidth on 75 meters
could be less than the IF bandwidth of many receivers used
for AM reception. A typical loading coil with a "Q" of 300
would have a bandwidth of 13 kHz to the half-power points
at 3.9 MHz.
Because of this sharp tuning, deviation from the center
frequency of the antenna will quickly introduce enough
reactance to present an impossible loading situation to the
transmitter. The antenna should be carefully adjusted for a
low SWR (standing wave ratio) before placing the
transmitter in operation.
The following is a list of antenna considerations for each
band of the Transceiver.
3.5 MHz
This band presents the greatest problem. The normal tuning
range of a good antenna on this band is about 10 kHz on
each side of the antenna's resonant frequency.
Actual measured resistance at the base of an antenna at
these frequencies is 15 to 20 ohms; this represents an SWR
of nearly 3 to 1. In order to get proper matching to the 50
ohm line, some antennas may require a 1000 pF mica
capacitor connected between the inner conductor and shield
of the coaxial line at the base of the antenna. Other
antennas may require a different value, somewhere between
300 and 1500 pF. This^ capacitor is part of an L network
that is used to get a 50 ohm match. The inductive portion of
this network is formed by a portion of the loading coil. The
correct combination is the one which produces the lowest
SWR at the desired operating frequency.
7 MHz
This band ordinarily does not need a correcting network,
and has a useful bandwidth of about 50 kHz.
14 MHz
No network needed. Bandwidth is approximately 100 kHz.
21 MHz
No network needed. Bandwidth is about 1 50 kHz.
28 MHz
The antenna for this band is normally cut for 1/4
wavelength, with no loading coil required. The bandwidth is
ab^ut 200 kHz.
TYPICAL TUNING PROCEDURE
The following is a typical tuning procedure.
A whip antenna that is properly tuned on 75 meters will
have a high peak of receiver activity for about 25 kHz
around the antenna's resonant frequency. Turn on the
receiver and tune through the band to discover where this
high peak of receiver activity is for the present setting of
your antenna. Then adjust the length of the whip in 1/4 Inch
increments and retune the receiver until the peak of receiver
activity is centered around the frequency at which you
normally operate. The antenna can then be tuned as
described in the following steps. The receiver peaking may
not be noticeable on bands other than 75 meters.
DETERMINING SWR
( ) 1. Connect an SWR meter in series with the lead to
your antenna.
( ) 2. Set the SWR meter to the "forward" position.
( ) 3. Set the Meter switch on your Transceiver to
PLATE. If the meter needle does not point to the
▼ mark on the meter scale when the PTT
button is depressed, perform the bias adjustment in
the Transmitter Alignment section of this Manual.
( ) 4. Turn the MODE switch to TUNE.
( ) 5. Peak the FINAL TUNE r LOAD, and DRIVER
PRESELECTOR controls. Adjust the
SENSITIVITY control on the SWR meter for a
full-scale meter indication.
( ) 6. Switch the SWR meter to the "reverse" position.
Note the SWR reading.
( ) 7. Switch the SWR meter to the "forward" position.
Then set the transmitter to several higher and lower
frequencies in 5 kHz increments and repeat steps 5
and 6 at each frequency, until you find the
minimum SWR.
Adjusting Antenna Length
( ) Set the transmitter to the desired operating frequency.
Then adjust the length of the antenna as follows:
A. If the point of the lowest SWR is lower than the
desired operating frequency, shorten the antenna as
described below.
B. If the point of lowest SWR is higher than the
desired operating frequency, lengthen the antenna
as described below.
C. Change the antenna length in 1/4" increments and
repeat steps 2, 4, 5, and 6 at each new length until
the minimum SWR is obtained. The SWR should be
about 1.2 or less at the desired frequency. NOTE:
It may be necessary to add a capacitor at the base
of the antenna, as described previously, if you
cannot get the SWR down to about 1.2.
Page 1 36
Noise Suppression Troubleshooting Chart
TYPE OF NOISE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
RECOMMENDED REMEDY
Loud popping increasing
with engine speed.
Ignition system.
1. Replace plugs with resistor type. (Highly
recommended.)
2. Loose crimped connections should be cleaned
and soldered.
3. Place resistors in distributor system.
Whine -varies with
engine speed.
Generator or
alternator.
1. Coaxial type capacitor in series with the
armature or stator lead.
2. Clean commutator.
3. Replace brushes.
4. Ground generator shaft.
5. Parallel trap (#10 wire-coil and suitable
capacitor) in series with armature lead,
tuned to operating frequency.
Distinct but irregular
clicking noise.
Voltage regulator.
1. Coaxial type capacitor in series with the
battery (B) and armature (A) leads.
2. A series combination of a .002 /iF mica
capacitor and a 4 £2 carbon resistor to
ground from the field (F) terminal. All
components should be mounted as shown in
diagram, close to voltage regulator.
Same as above.
Energy transfer to
primary system.
1. Bypass at the following points: coaxial
bypass in lead to coil from ignition switch;
battery lead to ammeter; to gas gauge; to
oil signal switch; head and tail light leads;
accessory wiring from engine compartment.
Loud popping noise that
changes from one type
road to another. Most
pronounced on concrete.
Wheel static.
1. Installation of front wheel static collectors
(available from most automotive distri-
butors). These should be checked every
5000 miles for excessive wear.
Same as above.
Tire static.
1. Injection of anti static powder into tire
through valve stem.
Irregular popping noise
when on bumpy roads,
particularly at slow
speeds.
Body static.
1 . Tighten all loose screws.
2. Use heavy flexible braid and bond the
engine to the frame and fire wall. Bond
the control rods, speedometer cable, exhaust
pipes, etc., to the frame.
If an extensive amount of suppression is required, the engine
should be retimed and tuned up by a competent mechanic.
NOISE SUPPRESSION
To obtain good noise suppression, you must suppress
electrical interference at its source, so it does not reach the
input of the receiver. Once it has been radiated, noise cannot
be suppressed by bypassing, etc.
It is difficult to determine the source of various types of
noise, particularly when several items are contributing to the
noise. Follow the procedure outlined below to isolate and
identify the various noise sources.
In most case, one source of interference will mask others.
Consequently, it will be necessary to suppress the strongest
item first, and then continue with the other steps. Figure
1-17 (fold-out from Page 143) shows a typical ignition
system and the suggested placement of noise suppression
components.
1. Position the vehicle in an area that is free from other
man-made electrical interference such as power lines,
manufacturing processes and particularly other auto-
mobiles.
2. With the Transceiver on, run the automobile at
medium speed. Then let up on the gas, and turn the
ignition switch to the "accessory" position or "off."
Allow the vehicle to coast in neutral. If the
interference stops, the major source of interference is
the ignition system.
Page 137
3. If the noise has a "whine" characteristic and changes
in pitch with varying engine speed, then the generator
is the major source of interference.
4. A distinct but irregular clicking noise, or "hash" as it
is sometimes called, that disappears with the engine
idling, indicates the voltage regulator is at fault.
5. A steady popping noise that continues with the
ignition off indicates wheel or tire static interference.
This is more pronounced on smooth roads.
6. The same type of interference as in step 5, but more
irregular when on bumpty roads, particularly at slow
speeds, indicates body static.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Chart on Page 146 and Figure
1-17 (fold-out from Page 143), to help determine how to
suppress most noise interference. Naturally, not all vehicles
will require suppression to the extent shown in Figure 1-17,
but some stubborn cases may require all the suppression
components shown, plus shielding of the ignition system.
Bonding of various parts of the automobile, starting from
the hood and continuing to the trunk, even including
bonding of the transmission line every few feet from the
antenna, may be necessary. Refer to the ARRL, and other
amateur handbooks, on this subject.
Page 1 38
i
Figure 1-18
OPERATION
NOTE: YOU MUST HAVE AN AMATEUR RADIO
OPERATOR AND A STATION LICENSE BEFORE
PLACING THE TRANSMITTER SECTION OF THE
TRANSCEIVER ON THE AIR. INFORMATION ABOUT
LICENSING AND AMATEUR FREQUENCY
ALLOCATIONS IN THE UNITED STATES IS
AVAILABLE FROM PUBLICATIONS OF THE FEDERAL
COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION OR THE AMERICAN
RADIO RELAY LEAGUE, 225 West Main Street,
Newington, Connecticut 06111.
Operation of the Transceiver has been simplified as much as
possible to permit rapid adjustment by the operator. Once
the initial settings have been made, it should not be
necessary to readjust most of the controls. Read the
following information carefully. Good operating techniques
will provide good clean signals and long trouble-free life of
the Transceiver.
CAUTION: Be sure a 50 to 75 £2 nonreactive load is
connected to the ANTENNA jack before operating the
Transceiver. This load can be an antenna, a dummy load, or
a properly adjusted linear amplifier. (See the “installation"
section of the Manual on Page 131 ).
READING THE METER
Figure 1-18 illustrates the meter face. The figures 0 to 9
under the left half of the arc are read as "S units," and the
figures above the right half of the arc are read as "decibels
over S9." The ▼ mark is the point to which the cathode
current is adjusted.
The ALC (automatic level control) position of the meter
switch results in "S Meter" action during reception, and
indicates the relative ALC voltage during transmission. No S
Meter action can be secured with the meter switch in the
REL PWR or PLATE positions.
The REL PWR position causes the meter to read an
uncalibrated amount of rectified output power. This
position is useful for determining the tuning conditions for
maximum output power.
The PLATE position of the switch causes the meter to read
cathode current to the final stages. There are six numbers on
the S Meter (in additon to 0). When reading cathode current,
each number represents 50 milliamperes. Thus:
Scale Milliamperes of
Number Cathode Current
0
0
3
50
6
100
9
150
20
200
40
250
60
300
READING THE DIAL
The tuning dial is calibrated in divisions from 0 to 500. Each
represents 5 kHz. The dial reading (in kHz) is added to the
Band switch setting (in MHz) to determine the frequency to
which the Transceiver is tuned. For example:
Band switch
Dial reading
Frequency
14. MHz
235 kHz
14.235 MHz
HEATHKIT®
139
Page 140
RECEIVER
1. Set the MODE switch to either LSB or USB.
2. Turn the RF GAIN control to its fully clockwise
postion.
3. Turn the AF GAIN knob and allow the Transceiver to
warm up.
4. Adjust the AF GAIN control clockwise until some
receiver noise is heard.
5. Set the FILTER switch to SSB or CW, as appropriate.
If an extremely strong station overloads the receiver front
end, leave the AF GAIN control set for comfortable
listening; then adjust the receiver level with the RF GAIN
control. This will keep the front end from overloading and
masking weaker signals.
The S Meter will move with adjustment of the RF GAIN
control, but will still read correctly with the RF GAIN set at
less than maximum (if the received signal level is high
SECTION
enough to register on the S Meter). For example, if the RF
GAIN control is set for no-signal meter reading of S5, and
the meter registers S9 with a signal, then the received signal
is S9.
6. The Transceiver is now ready to receive. Turn the
BAND switch to select the desired 500 kHz band
segment. The frequency of the tuned signal is
determined by adding together the settings of the
BAND switch, and the circular dial.
7. Peak the DRIVER PRESELECTOR for maximum
signal.
8. Set the FUNCTION switch to CAL. Rotate the MAIN
TUNING dial (VFO) to the nearest 100 kHz point on
the circular dial.
9. Adjust the MAIN TUNING dial until the calibrate
signal is at zero beat. (To be sure that the correct
calibrate signal is being used, check the DRIVER
PRESELECTOR tuning. If the signal strength varies,
you are tuned to the correct calibrator signal.)
TRANSMITTER SECTION
WARNING: Portions of each band are for CW operation
only. DO NOT operate the Transceiver with voice
modulation in any portion of a CW subband. To do so (in
the U.S.A.) will invite disciplinary action by the Federal
Communications Commission.
Make SURE your dial calibration is correct, since it is
possible for the circular dial to be 100 kHz off frequency.
For example, your dial could read 14.3 MHz but your actual
transmitting frequency could be 14.4 MHz, which is out of
the amateur band. Checking with the built-in calibrator can
insure that the circular dial is exactly on a 100 kHz point,
but you cannot be sure which one it is on. Therefore, before
transmitting, make sure you hear other amateur signals on
both sides of your chosen frequency. If you do not, check
your dial by turning the MAIN TUNING KNOB
counterclockwise to the end of its travel. The circular dial
should now be at the “500” end of its scale (refer to Detail
8-9B). If the calibration is correct for one band, it will be
correct for the other bands.
CAUTION: Each time you operate, you must perform all
of the following “Initial Tune Up” steps. You must also
follow this procedure any time you change the transmitter
frequency by more than ± 20 kHz.
INITIAL TUNE UP
The 10 steps of this procedure must be performed for all
modes of operation.
1. Set the BAND switch and Main Tuning dial for the
desired frequency.
2. Place the METER switch in the PLATE position.
3. Turn the MIC/CW LEVEL control fully
counterclockwise.
4. With the RF load connected to the ANTENNA jack,
set the MODE switch to TUNE. The meter should read
50 mA (at the v mark).
If the meter needle indicates other than 50 mA, perform the
BIAS adjustment described on Page 123 under Transmitter
Alignment.
CAUTION: Do not turn on full output power continuously
for more than 30 seconds at one time, or the final amplifier
tubes or power supply may be damaged. Each time full
output power is turned off, allow the tubes to coot for at
feast a minute.
Page 141
final
. 7 _ _
Figure 1-19
Refer to Figure 1-19 for settings of the FINAL TUNE knob
and lever.
5. Set the METER switch to REL PWR and adjust the
LOAD lever to the four o'clock position.
6. Set the FINAL TUNE knob to the position
corresponding to the band in use.
7. Turn the MIC/CW LEVEL control clockwise to obtain
a small up-scale indication on the meter. Then
alternately adjust the PRESELECTOR, the FINAL
TUNE knob, and the LOAD lever for a maximum
indication on the meter.
8. Turn the MIC/CW LEVEL control clockwise until the
meter reading no longer increases with knob rotation,
and again peak the FINAL TUNE and FINAL LOAD
controls for maximum output.
9. Set the METER switch to PLATE. The meter needle
should read approximately 40 on the scale, indicating
a plate current of 250 mA. {See "Reading the Meter,"
Page 139).
Important: Before you put the transmitter into operation
for the first time, and any time you change the final
amplifier tubes, make the following check: Tune the
transmitter as outlined in Steps 1 through 9 above. Then
operate the METER switch between REL PWR and
PLATE. The maximum power output (REL PWR) should
occur at approximately the same point on the FINAL
TUNE knob as the maximum dip in PLATE current. If it
does not occur at the same point, DO NOT operate the
transmitter until you have re-neutralized the unit as out-
lined (starting in the left column) on Page 123.
10. Return the MIC/CW LEVEL control to its full
counterclockwise position.
CAUTION: The Transceiver should be retuned if the
frequency is changed by any great amount. Be sure to
readjust the FINAL TUNE controls. It may also be
necessary to repeak the DRIVER PRESELECTOR control.
This completes the Initial Tune Up. Before placing the
Transceiver in operation, complete either the following CW
or Single Sideband adjustments.
CW OPERATION
For CW operation, the FUNCTION switch can be set to
either the PTT or VOX positions. Even though CW
operation is possible in the Calibrate position, it is not
recommended because of possible spurious outputs from
calibrator signals being present at the grid of the driver stage.
For 400 Hz CW selectivity, the Heath SBA-301-2 CW crystal
filter may be installed in addition to the SSB crystal filter
supplied with the Transceiver. The filter switch will then
select the SSB or the CW filter.
Be sure steps 1 through 10 have been satisfactorily
completed before proceeding with the following
adjustments.
( ) Place the MODE switch in the CW position.
( ) Plug a key into the CW KEY jack.
The VOX DELAY control is located on the right side of the
Transceiver.
( ) While sending a series of "V's", adjust the VOX
DELAY control so the relays stay energized between
groups of characters. Clockwise rotation of this
control will increase the holding time of the relays.
The final setting of the VOX DELAY control will be
determined by the sending speed of the operator. The
slower the sending speed, the higher the setting of this
control. NOTE: Be sure the VOX DELAY control is
adjusted so the relays do not open after each character
is sent.
( ) Set the MIC/CW LEVEL control to the minimum
position that produces full output (increasing the
control setting above this level DOES NOT increase
the output or the REL PWR reading).
CROSS-MODE OPERATION
After the dial is set to zero beat the calibrator signal, the
frequency of the CW output signal is 1000 Hz higher than
the dial reading. The received signal is actually in the USB
position even though the MODE switch is set at CW.
Consequently, cross-mode operation is possible between
USB and CW without any resetting of the MAIN TUNING
dial. For example, if two stations begin operation in the
USB mode of operation and one operator changes to CW,
the other station will hear a 1000 Hz note without retuning
his receiver. Also, the station operating in the CW mode will
receiver the USB signal from the other station without
Page 1 42
changing back to the USB position of the MODE switch.
When two stations are operating in the LSB mode and the
operator of one changes to USB or CW, contact will be lost
until the other station changes to either USB or CW.
SINGLE SIDEBAND OPERATION
Be sure steps 1 through 10 have been satisfactorily
completed before proceeding with the following
adjustments.
( ) Set the MODE switch to either the USB or LSB
position.
( ) Connect a microphone to the MIC connector.
( ) Set the METER switch to ALC (the meter needle may
"rest" below zero in the Transmit mode).
( ) Place the FUNCTION switch in the PTT position. (If
your microphone does not have push-to-talk
capabilities, make the VOX Adjustments and disregard
PTT Adjustments).
PTT Adjustments
( ) Actuate the transmitter and, while speaking into the
microphone, turn the MIC/CW LEVEL control
clockwise until the peak deflections register at about
S3 on the meter. Keep the meter deflection below the
S6 point on voice peaks for the most linear output.
Vox Adjustments
( ) Turn the MIC/CW LEVEL control fully
counterclockwise. Leave this control in this position
for the following adjustments.
( ) Set the FUNCTION switch to VOX.
NOTE: Close-talk into the microphone when using VOX
operation to prevent background noise from tripping the
Transceiver into transmit operation.
( ) While speaking into the microphone, turn the VOX
SENS control to just beyond a setting that will
energize the relays. Be sure this control is not set so
high that it will allow background noise to trip the
relays.
( ) Tune the receiver to a fairly strong signal and adjust
the AF GAIN control for a comfortable listening level.
( ) Place the microphone where it will normally be used.
Advance the ANTI-TRIP gain control to just beyond a
setting that will keep the speaker signal from tripping
the VOX circuits. Be sure this control is not set so
high that it completely disables the relay closing
action.
( ) Speak into the microphone and turn the VOX DELAY
control to a setting that will hold the relays energized
during the slight pauses between words. This prevents
the relays from tripping at the beginning and end of
each word.
NOTE: There will be a slight interaction between the VOX
SENS, ANTI-TRIP, and VOX DELAY controls.
Consequently, it may be necessary to readjust these controls
to achieve the desired results.
The Transceiver is now ready for operation in the SSB
mode. Speaking into the microphone (VOX) or using the
microphone push-to-talk switch (PTT) will change the
Transceiver from receive to transmit operation.
OPERATION WITH A LINEAR AMPLIFIER
Operation with a linear amplifier is similar to operation with
an antenna at the output of the Transceiver, except that the
linear amplifier input may have a different impedance. This
will make it necessary to adjust the FINAL TUNE controls
for maximum output (input to the linear amplifier). Figures
1-14 and 1-15 (on Page 132 and 133) shows the proper
connections between a linear amplifier and the Transceiver.
MOBILE OPERATION
Page 143
If the Heathkit dc Mobile Power Supply is to be used with
the Transceiver in a mobile installation, and the BIAS
control in the Transceiver has already been preset for fixed
station operation, make the following adjustments.
( ) Turn the MIC/CW LEVEL control fully
counterclockwise.
( ) Place the MODE switch in either the USB or LSB
position.
( ) Set the FUNCTION switch to PTT.
( ) Place the METER switch in the PLATE position.
NOTE: The following adjustment should be made with the
automobile engine running at about a 30 mph speed so the
battery is being charged.
Activate the transmitter with the push-to-talk button on the
microphone, and adjust the bias control in the mobile power
supply for a cathode current reading of ▼ (50 mA). This
will make it unnecessary to readjust the BIAS control of the
Transceiver each time it is changed from mobile to fixed
station use.
The VOX SENS, VOX DELAY, and ANTI-TRIP circuits will
operate in mobile use, but because of the different power
supplies, it may be necessary to readjust these controls.
Transmitter loading may be somewhat more critical on
mobile antennas because of their sharper frequency
characteristics. Consequently, the mobile antenna must be
tuned as closely as possible to the desired operating
frequency with the lowest possible SWR. Review 'Typical
Tuning Procedure" in "Mobile Installation" section (Page
134).
VALUE OF
SUPPR E550R
MANUFACTURER
REPRESENTATIVE
ERIE TYPE
L 7 V
SPR AGUE
4 8 P 1 8
0R ACKI
5 P R AGUE
8 0 P 3 i;
BUL KHE t
SPRAGUE
48 P 9 (2
BRACKE
DISTRIBUTOR
YIELDED
OMPLETE
5 I 0 N
SUPPRESSOR IN EACH
SPARK PLUG WIRE OR
USE RESISTANCE WIRE
W \ —
CAUTION
THE VOLTAGE REGULATOR SHOWN IS ONLY REPRESENTATIVE.
BATTERY. ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR CONNECTIONS MAY NOT BE
IN ORDER INDICATED. DO NOT BYPASS FIELD WINDING WITHOUT
A RESISTOR IN SERIES. CHECK TERMINAL LOCATION CAREFULLY.
RESISTOR
TYPE
5PARK PLUGS
AMMETER
UNUFACTURER AND
'RESENT ATIVE TYPE
■YPE
L 7VR -1 OME
YPE
L7VR-5ME
UE
48P 1 8 (40 AMP},
BRACKET MOUNT
UE
0OP 3 (20 AMP},
BULKHEAD MOUNT
UE
48 P 9 (2 0 AMP),
BRACKET MOUNT
3R Y
AG- 451
5R Y
AG-452
.5 M F
1
t
LIGHTS
t
ACCESSORIES
NOTE: ALL GROUND CONNECTIONS
SHOULD BE MADE TO THE COM-
PONENT BEING BYPASSED, PRE-
FERABLY BY MOUNTING THE
SUPPRESSOR DIRECTLY ON THE
COMPONENT.
FIGURE 1-17
'HbL
OF DIFFICULTY
IN CASE
A review of the "Operation" and "Installation" sections of
the Manual may indicate any conditions overlooked.
Refer to the Schematic Diagram (fold-out from Page 199)
and to the "Chassis Photos" and "X-Ray Views" sections
(Pages 182 to 189) for the locations of parts.
Check the receiver and transmitter voltage readings against
those shown in Figures 1-20 and 1-21 (fold-out from Page
144). Check the resistance readings against the readings
shown in Figure 1-22 (fold-out from Page 155). All voltage
readings were taken with an 11 M£2 input electronic
voltmeter. Voltages may vary as much as 10%.
Refer to the Receiver Signal Voltage Chart (Figure 1-20) if a
signal generator is used to troubleshoot the Transceiver.
NOTE: Breaks in the foil of the circuit boards can be
detected by placing a bright light under the foil side of the
board and looking through the board from the lettered side.
A break will appear as a hair-line crack in the foil.
Wiring errors and poor soldering are the most common
causes of difficulty. Therefore, the first step in
troubleshooting is to recheck all wiring against the Pictorials
and Schematic Diagrams. Often, having a friend check the
wiring will locate an error consistently overlooked by the
builder.
Quite often, soldered connections that appear good will have
an insulating coating or rosin between the wire, the terminal,
and the solder. This results from insufficient heat being applied
when you are soldering. You can eliminate many troubles by
reheating each connection to make sure that it is properly
soldered as illustrated in the “Kit Builders Guide.” The power
supply should be turned off and the power cable should be
removed from the power supply for such tests. As additional
insurance against shock, a screwdriver blade should be used
to short from the chassis to the red B+ wires.
If fuses blow instantly when power is applied to the unit,
check the power supply, B+ circuit, and filament circuits.
Check ail tubes for possible shorts. Also, refer back to the
"Initial Test" section on Page 117. Check to be sure that all
tubes are in their proper locations.
Be sure to read the "Circuit Description" so that
"Cause-and-Effect" reasoning may be employed as the
search for the trouble progresses. If some difficulty still
persists after the steps outlined in the Troubleshooting Chart
have been completed, try to localize the trouble to a
particular stage in the circuit by using the voltage and
resistance charts. Then refer to the Block Diagram and
Schematic to visualize circuit relationships.
144
KBATHKIT®
* WITH M00£ SWITCH
IN CW. KEY UP.
TRANSMITTER VOLTAGE CHART
FIGURE 1-21
TRANSMITTER VOLTAGES <±20%>
CAUTION: POWER SUPPLY FUSE OR CIRCUIT e
IF TRANSMITTER IS OPERATED WITH FULL Ti
FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS.
NOTES:
1. BANDSWITCH IN 3.5 POSITION.
2. DIAL SET AT 3700 kHz. TUNED FOR MAX. I
3. MODE SWITCH IN TUNE POSITION UNLESS
4. METER SWITCH IN REL PWR POSITION.
5. FUNCTION SWITCH IN PTT POSITION.
6. MIC/CW LEVEL FULLY COUNTERCLOCKW
SIGNAL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT (SEE BE
O DC VOLTAGE WITH MOOE SWITCH IN TUN!
O DC VOLTAGE WITH TRANSMITTER TURNEI
PTT SWITCH.
f | RF OSCILLATOR VOLTAGE (USE RF PROS!
□ RF SIGNAL VOLTAGE WITH MIC/CW LEVEI
59 + 20 DB IN REL PWR POSITION.
RECEIVER VOLTAGE CHART NOTES
1 DC VOLTAGES U2 V%) |
1.
POWER SUPPLY AND 8 ft SPEAKER CONNECTED.
2.
ANTENNA NOT CONNECTED.
3.
BAND SWITCH IN 3.5 POSITION.
4.
MODE SWITCH IN LSB POSITION.
5 .
FUNCTION SWITCH IN PTT POSITION.
6 .
RF GAIN MAXIMUM CLOCKWISE.
T.
AF GAIN AT 9 O’CLOCK POSITION.
8.
FILAMENT VOLTAGES NOT SHOWN: -
BROWN 6.3 V AC/DC
WHITE/BROWN - 12.6 V AC/DC
9.
BIA5 AT 50 MA PLATE CURRENT.
CD
MEASURED WITH 11 MEGOHM INPUT ELECTRONIC VM.
1 — 1
RF VOLTAGES - NO SIGNAL (USE RF PROBE WITH ELECTRONIC VM).
SIGNAL VOLTAGES
(Refer to Receiver DC Voltage Chart for Teet Point*}
CONTROL AND SWITCH SETTINGS AS IN DC VOLTAGE CHART EXCEPT
AS FOLLOWS:
1. DIAL FREQUENCY - 3.900 MHz
2. MODE SWITCH - LSB OR USB.
3. AF CAIN - SET TO HEAR SIGNAL WITH APPROXIMATELY 1000 Hz TONE
4. METER SWITCH IN ALC POSITION.
O SIGNAL INPUT POINTS.
SIGNAL GENERATOR TERMINATION
generator mu*t be very carefully od Justed for the strongest
signal indication at the Input Frequency listed in the chart below.
INPUT POINT
INPUT FREQUENCY
INPUT LEVEL
ELECTRONIC VM OR S-METER READING
1
3.395 MHz
20 mV
(AF GAIN MAX. CLOCKWISE)
4 V RMS AT 0 ft JACK
2
10 mV
S-4
3
"
10 mV
5-9 + 60 DB.
4
"
10 mV
S-9 + 60 DB.
5
"
10 mV
5-9 + 10 DB.
6
8.5 MHz
10 mV
5-9 + 40 DB.
7
3.900 MHz
10 mV
S-9 + 20 DB.
8
XT AL CAL ON
3.900 MHZ.
3.900 MHz
10 mV
S-9 + 40 DB PEAK DRIVER PRESELECTOR
S-9 + 20 DB PEAK DRIVER PRE SELECTOR
9 *
3.900 MHz
30 hV
S-9 APPROXIMATELY
* GENERATOR CONNECTED DIRECTLY- NO TERMINATION.
Page 145
Most of the RF voltages can be measured with an RF probe
connected to your VTVM. Read the comment under “RF
Voltage Servicing."
A grid dip meter, or wavemeter, and a general coverage
receiver are ideal instruments for checking operation of the
RF circuits.
NOTE: If there is instability in the unit, check all circuit
board mounting screws. These screws should be tight to the
chassis and to the circuit board. Be sure lockwashers are
against the foil side of the boards for good grounding.
The enclosed relays used in this unit should be troublefree
for years of normal use.
DO NOT REMOVE ANY OF THE TUBES OR PILOT
LAMPS WITH POWER APPLIED TO THE UNITS. Because
of the series-parallel filament circuit arrangement, removing
a tube with power applied may destroy other tubes due to
an increase in filament current through them.
RF Voltage Servicing
On the Schematic at the end of this Manual, the symbol
encloses a number indicating the RF voltage at that point.
Most of these symbols are found near the top of the
Schematic, although others will be observed near VI 6, the
VFO output, V19B, and the antenna output.
RF voltages are shown at the grid and plate of most tubes
carrying RF so you can determine whether the problem lies
in the grid or the plate circuit.
A Heathkit 11 Mfi input voltmeter with a Heathkit RF
probe rated at 90-volts rms was used to measure the RF
voltages. If your probe has a lower voltage rating, use the
following procedure:
Turn the MIC/CW LEVEL control fully counterclockwise,
touch the probe to the measurement point, and then turn
the MIC/CW LEVEL clockwise until a meter reading of 30
volts is obtained. If this occurs, consider that the reading at
this point is satisfactory. It should be expected that voltages
will vary from Transceiver to Transceiver. Crystal oscillator
voltages will vary considerably.
This procedure traces the RF signal voltage from stage to
stage. By this method, it is easy to isolate a problem stage so
that steps can be taken to correct the trouble. You should
start at the carrier oscillator and work through to the final,
as each stage is dependent on the previous stage.
Trace the RF up to the point it is lost; then back up one
stage. Should one or two bands be operating properly and
the rest have difficulty, make reference RF voltage
measurements on one of the operating bands and make
comparison measurements on the inoperative bands. In this
way, the stage causing difficulty is quickly isolated.
Once the stage is isolated, steps can be taken to correct the
problem. Check for wiring errors, intermittent solder
connections, loose hardware and bent switch contacts first;
then look for weak tubes, and last, for defective
components.
VFO Troubleshooting
VFO troubleshooting instructions are included on Page 154.
NOTE : In an extreme case where you are unable to resolve a
difficulty, refer to the “Customer Service" information
inside the rear cover of the Manual. Your Warranty is
located inside the front cover of the Manual.
Page 146
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
NOTE: References will often be made to previous
Symptoms and Causes. Therefore, each Symptom is
identifed by a number, and each Possible Cause has an
identifying letter. If you are directed, for example, to
“check item 1C," refer to Symptom number 1, Possible
Cause C.
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
No power, pilot lamps and
tube filaments do not light,
no B+ or bias voltage.
Pilot lamps and tube filament
light, but no bias or B+
voltage.
Bias and B+ voltage OK,
but pilot lamps and tube
filaments do not light.
Power supply switch at off position.
Power plug wired incorrectly.
Power cable from power supply wired
incorrectly or has loose connections.
Defective ac snap switch on AF Gain
control switch.
In mobile installation, power supply leads
reversed to battery.
Fuses or circuit breakers open.
Defective power supply.
Faulty battery or battery cables.
Check items 1 B and 1 C.
Rectifiers defective in power supply.
Transistors defective in dc power supply.
Check items IB and 1C.
Large brown-white wires in wire harness
open, wired incorrectly, or shorted to ground.
Low and high filament volt-
ages on various tubes or pilot
lamps.
Check item 3B.
Brown leads used to balance filament volt-
ages connected incorrectly, or not connected.
No regulated B+ (+150).
Relay RL2 wired incorrectly.
Bad OA2 regulator tube, VI 8.
Resistor R304 and/or R305 open or wired
incorrectly.
B+ voltage is 250 V instead of 300 V.
Regulated B+ voltage too high.
Regulated B+ voltage too low.
Check item 5B.
Resistor R304 and/or R305 wrong value.
Check items 5A, 5B, and 6B.
Shorted bypass capacitor in regulated B+
line.
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
8.
No screen voltage at tubes V4,
V10, and VII.
A. Lugs 3, 7, or 1 1 of relay RL2 wired wrong.
9.
High-pitched audio oscillation
A.
Red and blue audio output transformer leads
unaffected by AF Gain control.
B.
reversed.
AVC line shorted - no cutoff bias to VI 0 or
VII.
10.
No audio output from speaker
A.
Check items 5A, 5B, and 5C. I
or headphones.
B.
Defective transformer T301 .
C.
AF Gain control incorrectly wired, or
defective.
i
D.
Filter capacitor C304 shorted or installed
backwards.
E.
Audio amplifier output tube V14 defective.
F.
Coaxial cable connected to AF Gain control
shorted.
G.
Leads reversed at lugs 3, 7, or 1 1 of relay
RL2.
H.
Leads reversed at lugs 2, 6, or 10 of
relay RL2.
1 .
Speaker leads shorted.
11.
No audio output from speaker,
A.
Contacts 1 and 2 of Phones jack open.
but headphone output OK.
B.
Leads to Phones jack improperly connected.
C.
Speaker lead connected to wrong phono
socket.
D.
Defective speaker.
E.
Output transformer green, black, or white
leads connected wrong.
12 .
Low or no audio output from
A.
Phones jack wired incorrectly.
headphones, but speaker out-
put OK.
B.
Defective headphones.
13.
No signal or noise output, but
A.
Check items 10A, 10F, and 10G.
very low hum output can be
B.
RFC101 open.
heard (speaker or phones).
C.
Product detector tube VI 3 faulty.
D.
No carrier generator injection signal at
product detector. (Check items 32A through
32F.)
E.
Coaxial cable #1 connected to AF Gain
control open or shorted.
F.
IF transformer T102 misaligned or
defective.
G.
IF amplifier tubes V3 or V4 defective.
H.
Coaxial cable #4 from VI 2 to crystal
filter FL1 open or shorted.
1 .
RF Gain control wired backwards, or turned
down.
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
14.
No signal output, but noise out-
A.
Transformer T201 misaligned or defective.
put can be heard.
B.
No VFO injection signal at the cathode of
VI 2A. (Check item 34B).
C.
Coaxial cable connected between the band-
pass and driver plate circuit boards, open
or shorted.
D.
First IF amplifier tube V3 defective.
E.
Second receiver mixer tube VI 2A defective.
F.
No heterodyne oscillator injection signal at
the cathode of V1 1. (Check items 36A through
361).
G.
First receiver mixer V1 1 or RF amplifier
VI 0 defective. Also check items 3B and 4B.
H.
Coaxial cable connected between relay RL1
and the driver plate circuit board, open or
shorted.
Relay RL1 wired incorrectly.
J.
Bandpass filter T202 defective.
K.
Crystal filter FL1 defective.
L.
Filter switch in wrong position.
NOTE : One filter terminal may normally have a
3 12 to 5 ft resistance to ground.
15.
Audio output with signal, but
A.
Low B+ supply voltage.
weak.
B.
Coils on driver plate, driver grid, and heter-
odyne oscillator circuit boards misaligned.
C.
Check items 3B, 5A, 5B, 6B, 13A through 131
and 14A through 14K.
D.
RF Gain control is partially counterclock-
wise or wired incorrectly.
16.
Receiver tends to be unstable,
A.
RF driver and IF circuit board mounting
oscillates. (Receiver noise may
hardware not tight, or lockwashers left out
be extremely high, or many
between the chassis and circuit boards.
"birdies” appear across tuning
B.
Antenna transmission line open or shorted,
range.
C.
or has high SWR.
Supply voltage too high. (Check items 5B and
6B).
D.
Transmitter cutoff bias too low (V6 and V7).
17.
Sideband reception reversed or
A.
Carrier generator crystals Y1 and Y2 inter-
highly distorted.
B.
changed.
CW carrier generator crystal Y3 inter-
changed with either Y1 or Y2.
C.
Leads reversed at lugs 13 and 17 on the
Mode switch.
D.
Check VFO shifter adjustment.
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
18.
S Meter inoperative, indicates
A.
Leads connected to the meter are reversed.
backwards, is inoperative in
B.
Improper wiring of Meter switch.
some Meter switch positions.
C.
Meter Zero control improperly adjusted.
does not zero, or zero shifts
D.
One of the following resistors is a wrong
on some bands.
E.
value: R105, R106, R107,or R115.
First or second IF amplifier tubes (V3 or
NOTE: When transmitting, the
V4) defective.
meter may rest below zero in
F.
AVC line shorted to chassis.
the ALC position without harm.
G.
Lugs 4, 8, or 1 2 of relay R L2 wired wrong.
H.
VI 9, wrong type.
1 .
Heterodyne oscillator coils improperly set.
Readjust (see steps on Page 1 20).
J.
Defective Meter switch.
19.
No screen voltage at driver
A.
Relay RL2 not energized.
tube V7.
B.
Lugs 3, 7, and 1 1 of RL2 connected
incorrectly.
20.
Bias voltage does not shift to
Check item 19A.
operating levels in transmit
Lugs 2, 6, and 10 of relay RL2 wired wrong.
conditions.
Bias Adjust control set improperly.
21.
No RF output from final, re-
A.
No high voltage B+ at the plates of final
gardless of Mode switch posi-
amplifier tubes V8 and V9.
tion.
B.
RF choke RFC901 open.
C.
Lugs 8 and 1 2 of relay R LI wired wrong.
D.
Bias voltage too high at the grids of V8 and
V9. (Check items 20A through 20C.)
E.
Final controls not adjusted properly.
F.
Final amplifier tubes V8 and/or V9 de-
fective.
G.
Rotor in switch on driver plate circuit
board, or final tank switch, 180 degrees
out of rotation.
H.
I .
Final knobs or shafts loose.
Check items 23A and 23D.
22.
No RF output from driver re-
A.
No B+ voltage at the screen of V7. (Check
gardless of Mode switch posi-
items 19A and 19B.)
tion. (Second transmitter mixer
B.
RFC801 open.
appears to be OK.)
C.
Bias voltage at grids of V8 and V9 too high.
(Check items 19A, 20B, and 20C.)
i
D.
Coils on the driver plate and grid circuit
boards misaligned.
E.
Driver Preselector control not adjusted
properly.
F.
Driver tube V7 defective.
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
23. Low relative power reading.
A. MIC/CW Level control set too low.
B. Transceiver not properly tuned.
C. Antenna shorted, or too low impedance.
D. Improper voltages to V8 or V9.
24. High relative power reading.
A. Antenna too high impedance.
B. Open-circuited antenna.
25. No RF output from second
transmitter mixer, regardless
of the Mode switch setting.
(First transmitter mixer ap-
pears to be OK.)
A. Check items 5A through 5C, 19 A, 19B, 22D,
and 22E.
B. No heterodyne oscillator injection signal
at cathode of V6. (Check items 36A through
361)
C. Coaxial cable connected between the band-
pass and driver plate circuit board open or
shorted.
D. Second transmitter mixer tube V6 defective.
26. No RF output from first trans-
mitter mixer regardless of the
Mode switch position. (First
IF amplifier appears to be OK.)
A. Check items 19A, 19B, 20B, 20C, 22D, and
22E.
B. No VFO output signal to cathode of V5
(pin 7).
C. First transmitter mixer tube V5A defective.
D. Bandpass filter T202 defective.
27. No RF output from first IF
amplifier, regardless of the
Mode switch position. (Isola-
tion amplifier output appears
to be OK.)
A. Check items 14A, 14C, 14D, 14K, 19A, and
19B.
28. No RF output from isolation
amplifier, regardless of the
Mode switch position.
A. Check items 20 B and 20C.
B. Resistors R18, R19, R23, R24, R937, and/or
R938 wrong value.
C. Transformer T1 misaligned or faulty.
D. Isolation amplifier tube V2 defective.
E. Carrier oscillator not operating. (Check
items 31 B through 31 E.)
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
29. No RF output with the Mode
switch in USB or LSB, but
output in Tune or CW positions
OK.
A. Check items 19A and 25A.
B. No carrier injection signal to balanced
modulator. (Check items 30B, 30C, and 32A
through 32F.
C. Balanced modulator diodes CR1 through
CR4, installed improperly, wrong type, or
defective.
D. Coaxial cable #3 connected to the MIC/CW
Level control open or shorted.
E. Wafer 1 F or 1 R of the Mode switch wired
incorrectly.
F. MIC connector wired wrong.
G. Speech amplifier tube VI defective.
H. Microphone defective.
I. MIC/CW Level control defective.
30. No RF output with the Mode
switch in Tune or CW f but
output in LSB or USB OK.
A. Check items 19A, 19B, 20C, and 29B.
B. MIC/CW Level control defective.
C. Rear wafer of Mode switch wired wrong.
31. No carrier oscillator injection
signal with the Mode switch
in Tune or CW positions, but
LSB and USB output OK.
A. Check items 19A and 19B.
B. CW crystal Y3 improper frequency or
defective.
C. Lugs 1 , 5, and/or 9 of the Mode switch
wired incorrectly.
D. Incorrect wiring of Mode switch wafers
IF or 2R.
E. Tube VI 6 defective.
32. No carrier oscillator injection
signal with the Mode switch in
either LSB or USB positions.
Tune and CW output OK.
,
A. Check items 19A and 19B.
B. Coaxial cable from IF circuit board to
modulator circuit board shorted.
C. USB crystal Y1, or LSB crystal Y2, im-
proper frequency or defective.
D. Capacitors C4 through C8, Cl 6 and Cl 7,
wrong value.
E. Resistors R6 through R9, or R1 1, wrong
value.
F. Tube VI 6 defective.
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
33. Very low output in USB or
LSB modes.
A. T1 not aligned.
B. Microphone output level too low.
C. Tube VI defective.
D. Check item 23A.
34. No VFO injection signal at
cathodes of V5 or VI 2.
A. Check items 5A, 5B, and 5C.
B. Tube V20 defective.
35. VFO frequency does not shift
properly with Mode switch in
various positions.
A. Check items 5A, 5B, 5C, 32D, and 32E.
B. Mode switch wafer 1 F wired incorrectly.
C. Resistor R306 or R307 wrong value.
36. No heterodyne oscillator
injection signal at cathodes
of V6 and VII.
A. Check items 5A, 5B, and 5C.
B. One of the crystals Y501 through Y508 de-
fective, depending on the band being used.
C. Coaxial cable from heterodyne oscillator
circuit board to bandpass circuit board,
open or shorted.
D. Capacitors C208 or C223 wrong value.
E. Tube VI 9 defective or wrong type.
F. Coils L601 through L608 misaligned or
faulty.
G. Capacitor C604 wrong value.
H. No 1 50 V B+ voltage to the heterodyne
oscillator circuit board.
I. Rotors reversed 180 degrees in the switch
wafer on the crystal or heterodyne oscil-
lator circuit boards.
37. Relays RL1 and RL2 do not
energize with the Mode switch
in the Tune position.
A. Tube VI 2B defective.
B. Relays RL1 or RL2 defective.
C. Wafer 2F of Mode switch wired incorrectly.
38. Relays RL1 and RL2 will not
energize with Mode switch in
LSB or USB, and Function
switch in VOX position.
1
A. Check items 5A through 5C.
B. VOX SENS control improperly adjusted.
C. Tube VI 7A defective of wrong type.
D. Diode D201 wrong type or installed
backwards.
E. Zener diode D202 installed backwards or
defective.
F. Function switch wired incorrectly. Check
the white-red-red wire to lug 3.
G. Anti-Trip control set too high.
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
39. Relays energize and stay ener-
gized regardless of VOX Sens
control setting.
A. PTT switch on microphone stuck closed or
shorted.
B. Key closed.
C. C2 13 defective.
D. VI 2 defective.
E. Low B+, at 250 Vdc instead of 300 Vdc.
40. Transmitter tends to be
unstable.
A. Final and/or driver neutralization not
proper.
B. Mounting hardware for Modulator and RF
driver circuit board not tight. Lockwashers
between circuit boards and chassis left out.
C. Check items 16Cand 16D.
D. Coils L802 through L805 and/or L801 mis-
aligned.
E. Antenna impedance wrong.
F. Coil shield cover loose or missing.
G. Ground clips for tube shields bent out.
H. Hardware loose on sockets V8 and V9.
I. Excessive lead lengths of components
around V8 and V9.
41 . Receiver has slow recovery
from transmit condition.
A. Diode D101 defective.
42. Transmit output falls off.
A. Excessive heat due to restricted air
circulation.
B. Incorrect bias setting.
C. Improper load to RF output.
D. Gassy 6146 tubes.
E. Tube V7 weak.
43. Zero setting of main tuning
dial changes considerably from
band to band.
A. 100 kHz calibrator is not set exactly at
100 kHz.
B. Heterodyne oscillators not properly tuned.
C. Repeat the VFO alignment procedure on Page
121.
44. Low transmitter output,
all modes.
A. Wire from IF circuit board is not in hole 3
on the bandpass circuit board.
VFO TROUBLESHOOTING
A tube adapter may be used to check "in circuit" voltages
present at tube V20 in the VFO. Other than this, it will
normally be necessary to remove the VFO chassis from the
main chassis. Instructions follow for removing and replacing
the VFO and dial assembly as a unit.
VFO ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
( ) Remove tube VI 9 from its socket.
( ) Remove the screw holding the pilot lamp socket to the
VFO.
( ) Unplug the coaxial cable from the VFO output socket.
( ) Unsolder the bias, B+, and filament wires from the
Bias, B+, and Fil terminals on the back of the VFO
chassis.
( ) Loosen the setscrews in the Jackson drive hub on the
VFO shaft back of the panel.
( ) Remove the knob from the VFO shaft. Then remove
the screws at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions and
withdraw the drive assembly from the panel.
( ) Remove the 6*32 nuts and lockwashers from the spade
bolts which hold the VFO chassis to the main chassis.
( ) Work the VFO chassis upward until the spade bolts are
out of their slots, and to the rear until the VFO shaft
is free from the Jackson drive hub.
( ) Tack solder extensions to the power wires that were
removed from the back of the VFO chassis; tape the
joints to avoid short circuits. Connect and solder the
extensions to the appropriate terminals on the
removed VFO chassis.
( ) Use a clip lead or wire to ground the VFO chassis to
the main chassis.
( ) Turn the power on and test the unit in operation.
VFO ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
To replace the VFO, remove and discard the temporary
power extension wires and, in reverse order, perform the
steps detailed for VFO removal. Take care that the power
wiring is reconnected properly (white-gray to BIAS: orange
to B+; brown to FIL), and that the mounting hardware is
tightened after the VFO is positioned.
VFO Troubleshooting Chart
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 . Output low (after calibration).
A. Tube V20 weak.
B. Turn the Main Tuning dial to 300 and tune
the top core of coil FM for maximum VFO
output.
2. Output high.
A. Resistor R221 not soldered to point F on the
bandpass circuit board.
B. Core of VFO coil turned to wrong end. It
should be approximately 1-1/4” below the
end of the coil.
3. No output.
A. Q942 connected backwards.
B. Q941 connected wrong.
C. Lugs of C950 touching the chassis.
D. Output cable shorted.
E. Lead of C951 not connected through
lug 2 to TP terminal of L941 .
A. CR941 reversed.
5. Microphonics generated by
tapping VFO chassis.
A. Bend the leads of, or reposition, the two
56 pF disc capacitors so their surfaces are
separated more than 1/8”.
B. Component leads too long, permitting vibra-
tions or motion.
VFO RF TROUBLESHOOTING Follow the same step-by-step procedure as outlined for the
other parts of the Transceiver. Look for poorly soldered
Figure 1-23 shows the ac, dc, and RF voltages to be joints, stray bits of wire or solder, and component leads
expected in the VFO. These measurements were made with improperly touching each other or the chassis,
an 11 M£2 input voltmeter and, in the case of RF voltages
only, a Heathkit RF probe. RF voltage measurements were
made at 3700 kHz, LSB, receiving, with VFO output open
circuited. RF voltages may vary 25%.
RESISTANCE CHART
FIGURE 1-22
VFO VOLTAGE CHART
FIGURE 1-23
BLOCK DIAGRAM
SPECIFICATIONS
RECEIVER
Sensitivity Less than .3 microvolt for 10 dB signal-plus-noise to noise
ratio for SSB operation.
SSB Selectivity 2.1 kHz minimum at 6 dB down, 7 kHz minimum at 60 dB
down (3.395 MHz filter).
CW Selectivity (With Optional SBA-301-2 CW
Filter Installed) 400 Hz minimum at 6 dB down, 2.0 kHz maximum at 60
dB down.
Power Output 2 watts with less than 10% distortion.
Spurious Response Image and IF rejection better than 50 dB.
TRANSMITTER
DC Power Input SSB: (A3J emission) 180 watt P.E.P. (normal voice,
continuous duty cycle).
CW: (A1 emission) 170 watts (50% duty cycle).
RF Power Output 100 watts on 80 through 15 meters; 80 watts on 10 meters
(50 nonreactive load).
Output Impedance 50 SI to 75 12 with less than 2:1 SWR.
Oscillator Feedthrough or Mixer Products 55 dB below rated output.
Harmonic Radiation 40 dB below rated output.
Transmit-Receive Operation SSB: PTT or VOX.
CW: Provided by operating VOX from a keyed tone, using
grid-block keying.
HEATHKIT^
157
CW Side-Tone
Microphone Requirement
Carrier Suppression
Unwanted Sideband Suppression .....
Emissions not possible or not recommended
Third Order Distortion
RF Compression (TALC*)
Internally switched to speaker to headphones, in CW mode.
Approximately 1000 Hz tone.
High impedance with a rating of -45 to -55 dB.
45 dB down from single-tone output.
45 dB down from single-tone output at 1000 Hz reference.
A0, A2, A3b, A4 through A9, F0 through F9, and P0
through P9.
30 dB down from two-tone output.
10 dB or greater at .1 mA final grid current.
GENERAL
Frequency Coverage 3.5 to 4.0; 7.0 to 7.3; 14.0 to 14.5; 21.0 to 21.5; 28.0 to
28.5; 28.5 to 29.0; 29.0 to 29.5; 29.5 to 30.0 (megahertz).
Frequency Stability Less than 100 Hertz per hour drift after 45 minutes
warmup from normal ambient conditions. Less than 100 Hz
for ±10% line voltage variations.
Modes of Operation Selectable upper or lower sideband (suppressed carrier) and
CW.
Dial Calibration 5 kHz divisions.
Calibration 100 kHz crystal.
Bandspread 35 -1/3 revolutions for 500 kHz.
Audio Frequency Response 350 to 2450 Hz.
Front Panel Controls Main tuning dial.
Driver Preselector.
Final tuning.
Final loading.
Mic and CW Level control.
Mode switch.
Band switch.
Function switch.
Meter switch.
RF Gain control.
Audio Gain control.
Filter selector switch.
*Tfiple Action Level Control T * M -
Side Controls
Internal Controls
Tube Complement
Diode Complement
Transistors
Rear Apron Connectors
Power Requirements
Page 159
Meter Zero control.
Bias Adjust.
VOX Sensitivity.
VOX Delay.
Anti-Trip.
Carrier Null (control and capacitor).
Neutralizing.
Crystal calibrator.
VFO trimmer.
VFO shifter.
VFO coil.
OA2 Regulator (150 V).
6HS6 RF amplifier.
6HS6 1st receiver mixer.
6AU6 Isolation amplifier.
6AU6 1st IF amplifier.
6AU6 2nd IF amplifier.
6BN8 Product detector and AVC.
6AU6 VFO Amplifier.
6CB6 2nd transmitter mixer.
6CL6 Driver.
6EA8 Speech Amplifier and cathode follower.
6EA8 1st transmitter mixer.
6EA8 2nd receiver mixer and relay amplifier.
6EA8 CW side-tone oscillator and amplifier.
6GW8 Audio amplifier and audio output.
12AT7 Heterodyne oscillator and cathode
follower.
12AT7 VOX amplifier and calibrator oscillator.
12AU7 Sideband oscillator.
6146 Final amplifiers (2).
6 Germanium Diodes: Balanced modulator, RF sampling,
and crystal calibrator harmonic generator.
9 Silicon Diodes: ALC rectifiers, anti-trip rectifiers, and DC
blocking.
1 Zener Diode: cathode bias.
MPF-105 FET-VFO.
2N3393 Voltage regulator.
CW Key.
8 O output.
ALC input.
Power and accessory plug.
Antenna.
Spare.
700 to 850 volts at 250 mA with 1% maximum ripple.
300 volts at 150 mA with .05% maximum ripple.
-1 1 5 volts at 10 mA with .5% maximum ripple.
1 2 volts ac/dc at 4.76 amps.
Page 1 60
i
Cabinet Dimensions 14-13/16" wide x 6-5/16" high x 13-3/8" deep.
Net Weight 17-1/2 lbs.
Equipment Used to Prepare
Specifications Heath HN-31 "Cantenna."
Heath SB-610 Monitor Scope.
Heath IM-11 VTVM.
Heath MM-1 VOM.
Heath IG-72 Audio Generator.
Heath HDP-21 A Microphone.
Hewlett-Packard Electronic Counter,
Model 5246 L.
Tektronix Oscilloscope, Model 581 A.
Hewlett-Packard Signal Generator,
Model 606A.
Panoramic Radio Products Inc., "Panalyzor,"
Model SB- 12 A.
Boonton RF Voltmeter, Model 91 -CA.
Dynascan Digital Voltmeter, Model 111.
The Heath Company reserves the right to discontinue
instruments and to change specifications at any time
without incurring any obligation to incorporate new features
in instruments previously sold.
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to the Block Diagram (fold-out from Page 156) and to
the Schematic (fold-out from Page 199) while reading this
Circuit Description. Small sections of the Schematic are also
included in this description to make the circuits easier to
follow.
Note that the receiver circuits are across the bottom, and the
transmitter circuits are across the top of the Schematic and
Block Diagrams. Also, several of the circuits that are used
for transmitting are also used for receiving (such' as the
crystal filter and the first IF amplifier). These circuits, which
are shown in both the transmitter and receiver portions of
the Block Diagram, are identified in the Block Diagram by
dotted lines.
Each rotary switch is identified by the front panel name of
the switch, and by a letter-number designation that shows
the position of that wafer in the switch. See Figure 2-1.
Letter-number designations for the resistors, capacitors,
coils, etc., are placed in the following groups:
0-99 Modulator circuit board.
100-199 IF circuit board.
200-299 Bandpass circuit board.
300-399 Audio circuit board.
400-499 RF driver circuit board.
500-599 Crystal Switch-Board.
600-699 Heterodyne oscillator Switch-Board.
700-799 Driver grid Switch-Board.
800-899 Driver plate Switch-Board.
900-999 Chassis and VFO.
FRONT PANEL WAFER NUMBER F = FRONT SIDE
NAME OF SWITCH WITH SWITCH VIEWED OF WAFER;
FROM FRONT PANEL. R = REAR SIDE
OF WAFER.
Figure 2-1
HBATHKIT ®
161
TRANSMITTER CIRCUITS
The chart in Figure 2*2 lists the various frequencies that will
be found throughout the transmitter on each band. The
transmitted lower sideband frequency of 3.895 MHz,
modulated with a 1400 hertz audio tone, which is shown on
the first line, will be used when tracing through the
transmitter circuits. The other frequencies referred to in the
Circuit Description will also be found on the first line.
RELAY AND VOX AMPLIFIER
(Figures 2-3 and 2-4)
The Transceiver can be switched from receive to transmit by
either the VOX (voice controlled operation) or the
push-to*talk method. The VOX circuit works in the
following manner.
The audio signal from the microphone is coupled through
speech amplifier VIA and capacitor C9 to the VOX
Sensitivity control. From the arm of this control, the signal
is coupled through resistors R213 and R214 to the grid of
VOX amplifier V17A. The signal is amplified in VI 7A. It is
then coupled through capacitor C211, rectified by diode
D201, and applied to relay amplifier VI 2B, which actuates
the transmit-receive relays. VI 2B is biased to cutoff by
zener diode D202 in the cathode circuit When the grid
voltage overcomes the cathode bias, the tube conducts and
both relays close.
In the PTT and Calibrate positions of the Function switch,
and in the CW position of the Mode switch, the lead from
the VOX Sensitivity control to the grid of VI 7A is
connected to ground. This keeps stray microphone signals
from activating the VOX circuit during PTT and CW
operation, or during calibration. Relay amplifier V12B is
held in cutoff during receive operation by the positive
voltage that is maintained at its cathode by zener diode
D202. V12B is made to conduct for transmit operation by
the VOX voltage at its grid, or by the push-to-talk switch on
the microphone which shorts the cathode to ground. (The
cathode of VI 2B is also shorted to ground by wafer 2F of
the Mode switch in the Tune position.) Diode D201 rectifies
the audio signal from the VOX amplifier so that a positive
voltage appears at the grid of relay amplifier V12B. The
positive voltage at the grid causes the relay amplifier to
conduct, and the plate current of VI 2B causes relays RL1
and RL2 to close and place alt circuits in the transmit mode
of operation.
The VOX hold-in time is adjusted by varying the discharge
time for capacitor C213 with the VOX Delay control.
BAND
CARRIER
OSCILLATOR
(3393.6 kHz plus
1400 Hz mod-
ulation),
CRYSTAL
FILTER
AND IF
FREQUENCIES
VFO
FREQUENCY
(BETWEEN
5 AND 5.5)
SIGNAL FRE-
QUENCY AT
BANDPASS
FILTER
(BETWEEN
8.395 AND
8.895)
HETERODYNE
OSCILLATOR
FREQUENCY
(CRYSTAL
FIXED)
TRANSMITTED
SIGNAL
FREQUENCY
3.5 to 4
3.395
5.105
8.5
12.395
3.895
7 to 7.5
3.395
5.3
8.695
15.895
7.2
14 to 14.5
3.395
5.3
8.695
22.895
14.2
21 to 21.5
3.395
5.2
8.595
29.895
21.3
28 to 28.5
3.395
5.4
8.795
36.895
28.1
28.5 to 29
3.395
5.3
8.695
37.395
28.7
29 to 29.5
3.395
5.3
8.695
37.895
29.2
29.5 to 30
3.395
5.4
8.795
38.395
29.6
1 All frequencies are in MHz. J
Figure 2-2
TO RELAY COILS
Page 1 64
isr
Figure 2-5
FROM RECEIVER
POWER AMPLIFIER
V 14 B
ANTI-TRIP CIRCUIT (Figure 2-5)
The anti-trip circuit is used in the receive mode of operation
to keep the speaker signals from activating relay amplifier
V12B.
An audio signal is coupled through capacitor C305 from
audio power amplifier VI 4B to the Anti-Trip control. This
audio signal is then coupled through isolation resistor R25
and rectified by diodes D1 and D2, resulting in a negative dc
voltage across capacitor C25 and resistor R16. This negative
voltage is then coupled through resistor R27 to diode D201
as back bias, where it cancels out the voltage from the VOX
amplifier. Thus, with no positive voltage at its grid, relay
amplifier V12B remains cut off, and the relays remain in the
receive position.
SPEECH AMPLIFIER AND CATHODE
FOLLOWER (Figure 2-6)
The audio signal from the microphone is coupled directly
from lug 1 of the Microphone socket through resistor R931
to the grid of speech amplifier VIA. Capacitor Cl, at the
grid of VIA, limits the high frequency response of this stage
and bypasses to ground any RF signals present at this point.
The amplified signal from the plate of VIA is coupled
through capacitor C9 to the Microphone Level section of the
Mic/CW Level control and also to the VOX amplifier.
The setting of the Microphone Level control determines the
amount of modulation since it adjusts the amount of speech
signal that is coupled through cathode follower VI B to the
Figure 2-6
Page 1 65
(^5
Figure 2-7
balanced modulator circuit. For LSB and USB operation,
VI B grid resistor R12 is returned to ground through wafer
IF of the Mode switch and contacts 6 and 10 of relay RL2.
When the Mode switch is in the Tune or CW position,
cathode follower VI B is cut off by a bias voltage that is
supplied to it from the junction of bias voltage divider
resistors R308 and R309.
CARRIER OSCILLATOR (Figure 2-7)
The carrier oscillator consists of two Colpitts crystal
oscillators. These oscillators supply an RF signal to the
balanced modulator for transmit operation, and a
heterodyne signal to product detector stage VI 3C for
receive operation. Tube V16A and crystal Y1 (3396.4 kHz)
serve as the USB (upper sideband) carrier oscillator, and
tube V16B with crystals Y2 (3393.6 kHz) and Y3 (3395.4
kHz) acts as the LSB (lower sideband) and CW carrier
oscillator.
The desired carrier oscillator, VI 6B, for the transmitted
frequency being used in this Description (3393.6 kHz), is
placed in operation by wafer 1 R of the Mode switch which
connects its plate circuit to B+. Wafer 2R of the Mode
switch connects the proper crystal to the grid of VI 6B: Y2
for LSB operation and Y3 for tune or CW transmit
operation.
When the Mode switch is in the CW position, B+ is
connected through part of relay RL2 to either VI 6A (for
receive) or VI 6B (for transmit).
For receiving CW signals, lugs 9 and 1 of relay RL2 plac';
tube V16A and crystal Y1 in operation. For transmitting
CW, lugs 9 and 5 of relay RL2 place tube V16B and crystal
Y3 in operation.
When receiving a 1000 Hz CW signal, the receiver is tuned 1
kHz below the incoming signal (this signal is zero beat
against your transmitting frequency) by V16A and crystal
Y1, which are used as a VFO (beat frequency oscillator).
This generates a 1000 Hz audible signal. When transmitting,
tube V16B and crystal Y3 cause the output signal of the
Transceiver to be at the same frequency as the incoming
signal from the other station.
BALANCED MODULATOR (Figure 2-8)
Diodes CR1, CR2, CR3, and CR4, are connected in a ring
type balanced modulator circuit. When the audio signal from
cathode follower VI B and the RF signal from carrier
oscillator V16 are applied to this balanced modulator, two
additional frequencies are produced: one is equal to the sum
of the audio and carrier frequencies; and the other is equal
to the difference between them. These sum and difference
frequencies are the upper and lower sidebands; and only
these upper and lower sideband signals appear at the output
of the balanced modulator circuit.
CONTROL
The 3393.6 kHz LSB carrier oscillator signal is applied
through capacitor Cl 6 and across a bridge circuit that
consists of the Carrier Null control, resistors R15 and R17,
and diodes CR1, CR2, CR3, and CR4 of the modulator
diode ring. The carrier signal is balanced out by the Carrier
Null control and the Carrier Null capacitor; so there is no
output signal from this circuit (until audio signal is applied).
The audio signal that is coupled to diodes CR1, CR2, CR3,
and CR4 from cathode follower VI B unbalances the
modulator at an audio rate, causing the sum and difference
sideband frequencies to appear at the output of balanced
modulator transformer T1. When no audio signal appears at
the input, there is no output signal from the balanced
modulator circuit. Capacitor Cl 5 is an RF bypass.
When the Mode switch is turned to the CW or Tune position,
wafer 2F connects one side of the diode ring to ground. This
ground connection unbalances the nulled circuit and the
unbalance causes an RF output signal to be produced at the
secondary of balanced modulator transformer T1. This
signal is then coupled through capacitor C22 to isolation
amplifier V2. The secondary of transformer T1 is tuned to
the CW carrier frequency.
Figure 2-8
When transmitting, the output of V2 is coupled through
capacitor C506 to the crystal filter. In the CW mode of
operation, the gain of V2 is controlled by the CW section of
the Mic/CW Level control. This control supplies a variable
negative bias to the grid of V 2 through wafer 1 R of the
Mode switch and resistors R22 and R21.
B+ is supplied to the screen of V2 in the transmit mode
only, through resistor R937 and contacts 7 and 1 1 of relay
RL2.
CRYSTAL FILTER (Figure 2-10)
Crystal filter FL1 has a center frequency of 3395 kHz and a
usable bandwidth of Z1 kHz (3393.95 kHz to 3396.05 kHz
at the 6 dB points). See Figure 2-10. This filter, in the LSB
mode of operation, passes only the sum frequencies (the
3393.6 kHz carrier frequency plus all the audio frequencies
from 350 to 2450 Hz), which contain the upper sideband
ISOLATION AMPLIFIER (Figure 2-9)
Both the sideband and CW signals from the
balanced modulator circuit are coupled
through capacitor C22 to the cathode of
isolation amplifier V2, which operates as a
grounded grid amplifier. V2 isolates the
balanced modulator circuit from the crystal
filter, and provides proper impedance
matching to the crystal filter. The gain of
isolation amplifier V2 is varied by the ALC
(automatic level control) voltage, or bias
voltage from the Mic/CW Level control,
connected to its grid circuit through resistors
R21 and R22. The complete ALC circuit
will be described later under the heading
"ALC Circuit."
Figure 2-9
3393.95 3396.05
kHz kHz
Figure 2-10
intelligence. The carrier amplitude itself is further reduced
20 dB by the crystal filter. This attenuation plus the
attenuation of the balanced modulator gives an ultimate
carrier attenuation of at least 50 dB. (The apparent
frequency discrepancy here in sidebands and carrier is
overcome later, when the sidebands are inverted in the
second mixer.)
In the USB Mode, the filter passes only the difference
frequencies (the 3396.4 kHz carrier oscillator frequency
minus the audio frequencies from 450 to 2550 Hz); this
contains the lower sideband intelligence. In the CW Mode, a
carrier of 3395.4 kHz passes through the crystal filter with
virtually no attenuation.
If the SBA-301-2 Accessory CW Crystal Filter is installed,
the signal passes through it when the Filter switch is in CW.
The 400 Hz bandpass of the CW Filter will not pass the
normal audio range, so SSB signals are unintelligible.
IF AMPLIFIER (Figure 2-11)
IF amplifier V3 amplifies the signal received from crystal
filter FL1. The second IF amplifier, V4, is not used in
transmit operation. IF transformer T102, which is tuned to
3.395 MHz, acts as the plate load for V3. The output signal
from V3 is then coupled through capacitor Cl 1 1 to the grid
of first transmitter mixer stage V5A. The 6.8 MHz trap is
used to remove the second harmonic of the 3.395 MHz
signal.
ALC voltage is applied through lugs 8 and 12 of relay RL2
to the grid circuit of V3 to provide automatic level control
for the transmitted signal. When the Mode switch is in the
CW and Tune positions, the gain of IF amplifier V3 is
controlled by a variable dc bias applied to its grid. This bias
voltage, which originates at the arm of the Mic/CW Level
control, is coupled to V3 through wafer 1 R of the Mode
switch, and through lugs 8 and 1 2 of relay R L2.
The front panel meter, in the ALC position, is connected in
a dc bridge between the screen and cathode circuits of V3.
The metering circuits are explained separately on Page 180
of this Circuit Description.
FROM
V 2
OUTPUT SIGNAL
TO FIRST
TRANSMITTER
MIXER V5A
TO V4
(NOT USED
WHEN
TRANSMITTING)
VFO (Figure 2-12)
A field effect transistor is used in a type of Hartley oscillator
circuit in the VFO. Part of coil L941, variable capacitor
C950A (the main tuning capacitor), and fixed temperature
compensating capacitors are used in the frequency
determining circuits. The remaining part of coil L941 is used
for feedback to maintain oscillation.
Diode CR941 acts as a switch to add or remove C945 from
the circuit. This capacitor shifts the VFO frequency so the
output carrier-frequency remains the same when you switch
sidebands. CR941 is switched by the polarity of the voltage
applied to its anode by contacts 16, 18, and 20 of Mode
switch wafer 1 F.
Capacitor C944 couples the signal to the grid of tube V20,
which amplifies the VFO signal and couples it through T941
to the cathode of mixer tube V5A.
The transistor in the cathode circuit of V20 acts as a Zener
diode, using the base to emitter junction only.
FIRST TRANSMITTER MIXER (Figure 2-13)
The 3.395 MHz IF signal at the grid, and the 5.105 MHz
VFO signal at the cathode, are mixed in first transmitter
mixer tube V5A to produce sum and difference frequencies.
The 8.5 MHz sum of these two signals is coupled from the
plate of V5A through bandpass filter T202 to second
transmitter mixer V6.
^ p "* 169
The Bandpass filter T202 is tuned to pass only those signal
frequencies between 8.395 and 8.895 MHz; all other
frequencies are attenuated. Only the 8.5 MHz sum of the IF
and VFO signals falls within this frequency range, so it only
is passed on to the second mixer.
First transmitter mixer V5A, second transmitter mixer V6,
and driver V7 are cut off during the receive mode of
operation by a negative voltage that is applied to their grids
through diode D301 and resistor R301. This negative voltage
is removed for the transmit mode by contacts 6 and 10 of
relay RL2, which cause the cathode side of diode D301 to
be grounded.
HETERODYNE OSCILLATOR AND CATHODE
FOLLOWER (Figure 2-14)
Heterodyne oscillator V19A operates as a tuned-plate crystal
oscillator. The proper plate coil for each band, L601
through L608, is selected by wafer 2F on the Band switch.
The output signal from the plate of the oscillator is coupled
through cathode follower VI 9B to the cathode of second
transmitter mixer V6 and to the cathode of first receiver
mixer VII. The correct oscillator crystal for each band is
selected by wafer 1 R of the Bandswitch. The crystals below
20 MHz are fundamental types, and the higher frequency
crystals operate on their third overtones.
The grid voltage of VI 9A can be metered at TP to check
oscillator activity.
Figure 2-13
SECOND TRANSMITTER MIXER (Figure 2-15)
The 8.5 MHz signal from the first transmitter mixer and
bandpass filter is coupled to the grid of second mixer tube
V6. The 12.395 MHz output from the heterodyne oscillator
is coupled to the cathode of V6. These signals are mixed in
V6 to produce the operating frequency of 3.895 MHz.
The frequency of the tuned plate circuit of second mixer,
V6, is the operating frequency. All other frequencies are
attenuated.
The difference between the 8.5 MHz input frequency and
the 12.395 MHz heterodyne oscillator frequency results in a
second mixer output frequency of 3.895 MHz. This output
signal is coupled to the grid of driver stage V7.
The 3.5 MHz plate tuning coil, L701, is connected across the
plate tuned circuit on all bands. Band switch wafer 3F
connects the correct amount of inductance in parallel with
L701 to tune each band, except the 3.5 MHz (80 meter)
band, which uses coil L701 only.
Tuning capacitor, C421B, is connected across the tuned
circuit on all bands. Band switch wafer 3R connects tuning
capacitor C421A on the 3.5 MHz band only, C703 on 3.5
and 7.0 MHz bands, and C704 on 14 MHz and lower
frequencies.
DRIVER (Figure 2-16)
Driver stage V7 amplifies the 3.895 MHz signal from second
transmitter mixer V6 to a level that is sufficient to drive the
final amplifiers.
The 3.5 MHz plate tuning coil, L801, is connected across the
plate tuned circuit on all bands. A secondary (link) winding
on L801 is used in the receive mode of operation to couple
the received signal into the Transceiver.
Band switch wafer 4F connects the correct amount of
inductance in parallel with L801 to tune each band, except
the 3.5 MHz (80 meter) band, which uses coil L801 only.
Band switch wafer 4R connects additional capacitance in
parallel with tuning capacitor C422B for the 80 meter (3.5
MHz), 40 meter (7 MHz), and 20 meter (14 MHz) bands.
Neutralization of V7 is accomplished by feeding a portion of
the plate signal back to the grid through a "neutralizing
wire" capacitor to the plate tuned circuit of the second
transmitter mixer.
FINAL AMPLIFIERS (Figure 2-17, fold-out from
Page 173)
Final amplifier tubes, V8 and V9, are connected in parallel
and function as class AB1 linear amplifiers. A fixed negative
Figure 2-15
(3E
Page 171
AMPLIFIERS V«
AND V9
Figure 2-16
bias is applied to the grids of these tubes through resistor
R916 and choke RFC 902. This bias limits zero-signal plate
current. B+ is removed from the screen grids under receive
conditions, by lugs 7 and 11 of relay RL2 to reduce the
plate current to zero and cut off the tubes. RF driving
voltage is developed across RFC 902. Plate voltage is shunt
fed through RFC 901.
For the LSB and USB modes of operation, the driving
voltage is controlled by the Microphone level control (in the
grid circuit of VI B) and the limiting action of the ALC
(automatic level control) voltage. This ALC voltage is fed
back to isolation amplifier V 2 and IF amplifier V3.
The output signal from V8 and V9 is coupled through RF
parasitic chokes L901 and L902 and through capacitor C915
to the final tuning capacitor C925 and plate tank coils L903
and L904. The Parasitic chokes eliminate any tendency
toward VHF parasitic oscillation.
Wafer 5R of the Band switch connects the proper portion of
the plate tank coil in the circuit for each band by shorting
out the unused section. Wafer 5R also selects the proper
combination of final tank tuning and loading capacitors for
each band.
Neutralization of the final amplifier is accomplished by
feeding a portion of the plate signal back to the grid through
neutralizing capacitors C913 and C914, and across C801 in a
bridge circuit.
The output signal from the final tank coil is coupled through
lugs 8 and 12 of relay RL1 to the Antenna socket.
D901 and R953 aid in providing quick return of the
receiving function after release of the key or the microphone
switch when the Function Switch is at PTT.
ALC CIRCUIT (Figure 2-17, fold-out from
Page 173)
The ALC (automatic level control) bias voltage is developed
from a small portion of the signal in the final amplifier stage.
This signal is rectified, filtered, and fed back to the
preceding stages to adjust their gain automatically, as
needed. ALC voltage assures maximum transmitter output
without overloading.
The ALC voltage for this Transceiver is developed in the
Heath TALC* (Triple Action Level Control) circuit. This
circuit keeps the transmitter from overloading by
compressing the speech waveform. The triple action of this
circuit is described below in paragraphs 1, 2, and 3.
1. Any peak voltages at the grids of final tubes V8 and
V9 that drive the grids positive into grid current will
develop bursts of voltage across resistor R916. This
forms an audio-frequency voltage that is coupled
through capacitor C911 to voltage doubler rectifiers
D902 and D903. The rectified negative output voltage
goes to the ALC line.
Registered Trademark, Heath Company
Page 172
2. The variations that occur in the final amplifier screen
supply voltage on speech peaks produce a varying
voltage which is coupled through capacitor C908 to
rectifiers D902 and D903. This second voltage source
produces additional ALC voltage.
3. Additional ALC voltage can be obtained from an
external linear power amplifier. This voltage is applied
to the ALC Input and goes directly to an RC network,
which is explained below.
The rectified voltage from diode D903 (and the voltage from
an external amplifier, if used) is applied to an RC network
consisting of resistors R914 and R915, and capacitors C931
and C932. This network filters the dc bias voltage, and
allows it to build up quickly and decay slowly.
From the RC filter network, the ALC voltage is applied to
the grid of isolation amplifier V2, where it limits the output,
thus, reducing the drive available to the final amplifiers. The
ALC voltage is also coupled through lugs 8 and 12 of relay
RL2to IF amplifier V3.
ALC voltage is not developed for CW operation. Adjustable
bias from the Mic/CW Level control is used instead.
TONE OSCILLATOR AND AMPLIFIER
(Figure 2-18)
The tone oscillator circuit, V15, generatesa 1000 Hz audio
signal that is used for CW operation only. This tone is
inserted into the VOX circuit to turn on the transmitter. It
is also coupled to the receiver audio amplifier so the
operator can monitor his keying.
Tone oscillator VI 5A is turned on when its cathode is con-
nected to ground through wafer 2F of the Mode switch. The
output frequency of VI 5A is determined by the phase-shift
network in its grid circuit. From the plate of VI 5A, the 1000 Hz
tone is coupled through capacitor C315 and resistor R329 to
the grid of tone amplifier VI 5B.
Tone amplifier VI 5B is normally cut off by a negative bias
that is applied to its grid from the junction of resistors R31 1
and R312. When the CW key is closed, this cut-off bias is
removed (resistor R311 is shorted out through Mode switch
wafer 1 F and the key), and VI 5B conducts.
From the plate of VI 5B, the 1000 Hz tone is coupled
through capacitor C311 to audio amplifier V14B. The 1000
Hz tone is also coupled through capacitor C313 and resistor
R328 to the grid of VOX amplifier VI 7A, where it causes
the transmitter to be turned on.
CW OPERATION (Full Schematic)
When the Mode switch is turned to the CW position, the
following circuit changes occur:
1. Cathode follower VI B is cut off and the arm of VOX
Sensitivity control is grounded so stray microphone
signals do not reach the balanced modulator or VOX
circuits.
2. CW crystal Y3 is connected to the grid of carrier
oscillator VI 6B.
3. The balanced modulator circuit is unbalanced so it will
produce an output signal (see Mode switch wafer 2F).
Page 1 73
V15B
1/2 6EA8
TONE
AMPLIFIER
4. The transmitter CW signal passes through the SSB
Filter.
5. The drive to the final amplifiers is controlled by the
CW section of the MIC/CW Level control, which
adjusts the bias of isolation amplifier V2 and IF
amplifier V3.
6. Cutoff bias is applied to the grids of transmitter
mixers V5A and V6, and to the grid of driver amplifier
V7, through Mode switch wafer IF and diode D904.
7. Tone oscillator VI 5A is turned on.
When the key is closed, the 1000 Hz tone signal is coupled
to the VOX circuit, where it causes the relays to be switched
to the transmit position.
The relays stay in this position for a length of time that is
determined by the setting of the VOX Delay control.
At the same time, the key shorts out the cutoff bias that is
applied to the transmitter mixer stages and to the driver
amplifier stage, allowing them to conduct and place the
transmitter on the air.
The RF output signal from CW carrier oscillator VI 6B is
coupled to the balanced modulator stage. The unbalanced
condition of this stage causes the RF signal to be coupled
through transformer T1 to isolation amplifier V 2. From V2,
the signal proceeds through the transmitter in the same
manner as the LSB and USB signals.
TO GRIDS OF V8 AND
V9 THROUGH PLATE
TANK OF V7
FIGURE 2-17
TO GRIDS OF V8 AND
V9 THROUGH PLATE
TANK OF V7
CIRCUIT
IGURE 2-17
Page 174
T-R SWITCHING
Figure 2-19 (fold-out from this page) shows the position and
assigns an identifying number to each of the relay sections
on the Main Schematic. The numbers will be used in the
following paragraphs to explain how each section is used.
1. This section applies B+ voltage to the correct half of
carrier oscillator tube V16 in the Tune and CW
positions of the Mode switch.
2. This section is connected to the Power and accessory
plug for external use with linear amplifiers and other
devices. The contacts have a rating of 3 amperes at
117 Vac or 30 Vdc.
3. These contacts apply B+ voltage to the screens of V2,
V7, V8, and V9 in the transmit mode, and to the
screen of V4, V10, and VII in the receive mode of
operation.
4. These contacts ground the receiver cutoff bias in the
receive mode. In the transmit mode, they ground the
cutoff bias that is applied through diode D301 to
transmitter stages V5A, V6, and V7.
5. In the transmit mode, these contacts apply ALC
voltage (or CW bias) to the grid of V3. In the receive
mode they apply AVC voltage to V3.
6. This section switches the antenna between the receive
and transmit circuits.
Refer to the Schematic diagram for the following portion of
the Circuit Description.
When the Transceiver is in the transmit mode, a large
negative bias (approximately -90 volts) is applied through
the RF Gain control and diode D905 to the grids of RF
amplifier V10 and first receiver mixer VII. Small amounts
of negative bias are also applied to second receiver mixer
VI 2A, second IF amplifier V4, and audio amplifier VI 4A.
The large bias is necessary at VI 0 to keep the transmitter
signal at the driver plate from causing VI 0 to conduct on
large voltage peaks. (If this happens, spikes will appear at the
peaks of the envelope on the transmitted signal.)
First audio amplifier VI 4B is cut off by the bias voltage to
quiet the receiver audio stages when LSB or USB signals are
being transmitted. A negative pulse is also applied to the grid
of VI 4A to cut it off before the relay contacts close. This is
done so the switching transients, which cause a "popping"
sound, will not be heard in the speaker.
The negative pulse that is applied to V14B is formed by the
sudden voltage change that occurs at the plate of relay
amplifier VI 2B when that stage is turned on by the VOX
circuit. This pulse is shaped by a network that consists of
resistors R337, R338, R339, and R340 and capacitors C320,
C321, C322, and C323.
The plate tank circuit of V6, the second transmitter mixer,
is used in the receive mode as the plate circuit of V10, RF
amplifier. Due to tube and stray capacity differences,
additional capacity is required when receiving to permit the
driver preselector to peak at the same dial setting in both
transmit and receive modes. Automatic diode switching is
used to add the required compensating capacity:
1. A negative voltage is always applied through R302 and
R954 to the anode of D907. This back bias cuts off
the diode and causes it to act as an open switch.
Therefore, capacitor C955 has no ground connection
and is out of the circuit.
2. In the receive mode, a higher positive voltage through
contacts 11 and 3 of RL2 is applied through R955as
forward bias to the anode of D907. The diode now
conducts and acts as a closed switch to connect C955
to ground. This action increases the plate circuit
capacity of VI 0, RF amplifier.
URE 2-21
FIGURE 2-19
FIGURE 2-21
RECEIVER CIRCUITS
NOTE: Figure 2-20 shows the various frequencies that will
be found throughout the Transceiver on the different bands.
A received signal (lower sideband) frequency of 3.895 MHz,
shown on the first line of the chart, will be used when
tracing through the receiver circuits. The other associated
frequencies used in this Description are also shown on the
first line.
BAND
RECEIVED
SIGNAL
FREQUENCY
HETERODYNE
OSCILLATOR
FREQUENCY
(CRYSTAL)
SIGNAL
FREQUENCY
AT BANDPASS
FILTER
(BETWEEN
8.395 AND
&895)
2ND RECEIVER
MIXER
CRYSTAL
FILTER
AND IF
FREQUENCIES
VFO FREQUENCY
(BETWEEN 5 AND
5.5)
3.895
12.395
8.5
3.395
5.105
7 to 7.3
7.2
15.895
8.695
3.395
5.3
14 to 14.5
14.2
22.895
8.695
3.395
5.3
21 to 21.5
21.3
29.895
8.595
3.395
5.2
28 to 28.5
28.1
36.895
8.795
3.395
5.4
28.5 to 29
28.7
37.395
8.695
3.395
5.3
29 to 29.5
29.2
37.895
8.695
3.395
5.3
29.5 to 30
29.6
38.395
8.795
3.395
5.4
| All frequencies in MHz.
Figure 2-20
RF AMPLIFIER (Figure 2-21, fold-out from Page
174)
The 3.895 MHz input signal from the antenna is coupled
through lugs 4 and 12 of the antenna relay (RL1 ) to the link
winding of coil L801. The secondary of L801, part of the
driver preselector capacitor, and the other components in
the driver plate tank circuit, are also used as the input tuned
circuit for RF amplifier VI 0. From L801, the signal is
coupled through capacitor C408 to the grid of V10.
The received signal is amplified in VI 0, and then coupled
through capacitor C419 to first receiver mixer VII. The
plate tuned circuit of V10 consists of coil L701, part of the
driver preselector capacitor, and the other components of
the second transmitter mixer plate tank circuit. The
automatic switching of C955 into the plate circuit of VI 0 is
described under "T-R Switching."
The gain of RF amplifier VI 0 and first receiver mixer V1 1 is
controlled by the AVC voltage, and an adjustable negative
bias that is coupled to their grids from the RF Gain control.
The 8.5 MHz trap at the antenna switching relay helps to
prevent entry of very strong signals (at this frequency)
which might interfere with the IF circuits.
Page 1 76
Eli
CRYSTAL
FILTER
Figure 2-22
FIRST AND SECOND RECEIVER MIXERS
(Figure 2-22)
The amplified 3.895 MHz signal from RF amplifier V10 is
coupled through capacitor C419 to the grid of V1 1 , the first
receiver mixer.At the same time, a crystal controlled 12.395
MHz signal is coupled to the cathode of VII from V19B,
the heterodyne oscillator cathode follower. These two
signals are then mixed together in VII and the sum and
difference frequencies are coupled to the bandpass filter.
The bandpass filter, which passes only the frequencies
between 8.395 and 8.895 MHz, allows the 8.5 MHz
difference frequency to pass on from VII to the grid of
second mixer tube VI 2A.
A 5.105 MHz signal is coupled from VFO to the cathode of
VI 2A. The 8.5 MHz signal at the grid and the 5.105 MHz
signal at the cathode are then mixed together in tube VI 2A
and the 3.395 MHz difference frequency is coupled through
crystal filter FL1 to the IF amplifiers.
IF AMPLIFIERS (Figure 2-23)
The signal from crystal filter FL1 is coupled through
capacitor C101 to first IF amplifier V3. The amplified signal
from V3 is coupled to two places: to grid of V5A, which is
cut off in receive operation; and to second IF amplifier V4
through IF transformer T102.
The amplified signal from V4 is coupled through IF
transformer T103 to the product detector, VI 3C. The same
signal is also coupled through capacitor Cl 1 2 to the plate of
AVC rectifier VI 3B. Supply voltage for the screen of IF
amplifier V4 is switched through lugs 3 and 1 1 of relay RL2.
AVC voltage is supplied to the grid of V4 by the AVC line.
AVC voltage is switched to the grid of V3 through lugs 4
and 12 of relay RL2.
AVC CIRCUIT (Figure 2-24)
The negative bias at the control grids determines the amount
of amplification that will be obtained from RF amplifier
Page 177
ifg
VI 0, first receiver mixer VII, and IF amplifiers V3 and V4.
The dc bias for these stages comes from the following two
sources: from the -dc voltage at the arm of the RF Gain
control; and from the AVC voltage. These two voltage
sources are connected to diodes D101 and D905, which act
as a diode gate. This diode gate permits either voltage to
control the gain (of VI 0, VII, etc.) without interacting with
each other.
From the two diodes, the bias voltage is coupled through
resistor R412 to the grids of V10 and VII, and through
resistor R415 to the grids of V3 and V4. Voltage divider
resistors R415 and R416 cause only one half of the total
bias voltage to be coupled to the grids of IF amplifiers V3
and V4.
AVC voltage is obtained by coupling part of the IF signal
through capacitor Cl 12 to AVC diodes VI 3A and VI 3B.
These diodes produce a negative dc voltage at pin 1 of VI 3A
that is proportional to the signal strength. This negative
voltage is developed across resistors R124 and R117, and
capacitors Cl 10 and Cl 24. Capacitor Cl 24 charges quickly
to the peak voltage so the AVC will respond quickly to keep
large signals from being distorted in V3, V4, V10, and VII.
Capacitor Cl 10 charges more slowly, and causes the AVC
voltage to be proportional to the average signal level of the
received signal. This produces a fast-attack, slow-release
AVC characteristic.
AVC TO V3
Figure 2-24
An incoming signal that produces a negative AVC voltage
that is significantly higher than the bias voltage from the RF
Gain control causes the gain of V10, VII, V3, and V4 to be
reduced. This keeps the output of the RF and IF amplifier
stages at a nearly constant level despite wide amplitude
changes in the received signal.
Page 1 78
PRODUCT DETECTOR {Figure 2-25)
The 3.395 MHz signal from IF amplifier V4 is coupled to
the grid of product detector tube VI 3C. At the same time,
the signal from carrier oscillator VI 6 is fed to the cathode of
VI 3C (3.3936 MHz for the lower sideband, or 3.3964 MHz
for the upper sideband and CW).
These two signals are then mixed together in V13C, resulting
in an audio output signal which is the difference frequency
between these two signals. Capacitors C119 and C121, and
resistor R119 are connected in a filter network that bypasses
any RF signal coming from V13C to ground, but permits the
audio signal to pass through to audio amplifier V14A.
AUDIO AND POWER AMPLIFIER (Figure 2-26)
The signal from the product detector is applied to the AF
Gain control to determine the amount of signal that will be
coupled through capacitor C308 to the grid of audio
amplifier V14A. The audio signal is amplified in V14A and
then coupled to power amplifier V14B. Tube V14B
amplifies the signal further and supplies the audio power
INPUT SIGNAL
FROM IF AMPLIFIER V4
Figure 2-25
through output transformer T301 to the output connectors.
Capacitor C912 couples a portion of the output back to the
cathode of V14B as negative feedback for less distortion.
Two outputs are provided by the secondary of transformer
T301 : a headphone output and an 8 12 speaker output.
Audio power to the 8 12 speaker jack is rated at 2 watts
maximum.
An audio signal is also supplied to the anti-trip network
from the plate of V14B. In the CW mode, a sidetone signal is
supplied to the network from the plate of VI 5B.
V14A
Figure 2-26
CRYSTAL CALIBRATOR (Figure 2-27)
Crystal calibrator stage V17B is connected as a Pierce crystal
oscillator. When the Function switch is placed in the
Calibrate position, the cathode of V17B is grounded, and an
accurate 100 kHz signal is connected through capacitor
C218 and diode CR201 to the antenna input of the receiver.
The harmonics of this signal are then used for dial
calibration checks.
Capacitor C220 may be adjusted to set the crystal calibrator
to exactly 100 kHz using some standard such as WWV.
The Calibrate position of the Function switch also connects
the grid of VOX amplifier VI 7A to ground to avoid
accidental energizing of the transmitter when using the
crystal calibrator.
Page 1 79
METERING CIRCUITS
Refer to Figure 2-28.
For the transmitting mode of operation, there are three
different settings of the Meter switch: Plate (Final Power
Amplifier cathode current), ALC voltage, and Relative
Power output. In the ALC position, in the receive mode, the
meter operates as an S Meter.
To measure power amplifier cathode current, the meter is
connected between the cathodes of the finals and ground, in
parallel with the cathode resistor. To read cathode current
on the meter, consider that each of the figures on the meter
scale (3, 6, 9, 20, 40, and 60) represents 50 mA of current.
For example, if the meter needle is at the figure 9, it shows
150 mA of cathode current (three 50 mA units), and the full
scale reading at 60 represents 300 mA of final cathode
current (six 50 mA units).
To measure ALC voltage, the meter is connected between
the cathode and screen circuits of IF amplifier V3. When V3
receives a signal, the resulting current fluctuations in the
cathode are indicated on the meter. Since the ALC voltage
at the grid controls the gain of V3, the cathode current of
V3 gives a relative indication of the ALC voltage level.
For Relative Power measurements, a small portion of the
transmitter output signal is developed across resistor R912,
rectified by diode CR901, and filtered by capacitor C933.
The resulting dc voltage is then indicated by the meter.
When the Transceiver is in the receive condition, and the
Meter switch is at ALC, the meter indicates the relative
strength of the received signal in S units. The circuit
operates just as it does when it measures ALC voltage,
except that the current in V3 is now controlled by the AVC
voltage at the grid of V3.
The meter Zero Adj control is adjusted for a zero indication
on the meter with the antenna disconnected and RF Gain
control at the full clockwise position. The decrease in plate
current (due to a larger AVC voltage) that occurs when a
signal is received by tube V3 then appears as an indication
on the S Meter.
Page 1 83
R916
C917
C928
C926
C936
C927
R924
C941
R917
R920
C920
C908
C931
C919
D901
C918
C916
D902
R915
R914
C932
RFC 902
R938
C91 1
R953
R937
C939
C937
D903
Page 1 84
Page 1 85
R903
C910
C912
R926
(Hid)
D904
C907
CIRCUIT BOARD X-RAY VIEWS
(viewed from foil side)
- I — >
RFC tOt
X4J0
V10
6 Mi 6
1 VII
C ®HS 6
ON FOIL SIDE
RF DRIVER CIRCUIT BOARD
IF CIRCUIT BOARD
Page 1 88
C18 AND C22
MOUNTED ON
FOIL SIDE
,rK,\ J';;, : V- • ‘ ' I
— -
m j m i
BSbi
MODULATOR CIRCUIT BOARD
HETERODYNE OSCILLATOR
SWITCH-BOARD
ON SWITCH WAFER
DRIVER PLATE SWITCH-BOARD
AUDIO CIRCUIT BOARD
ON SWITCH WAFER
DRIVER GRID SWITCH-BOARD
PARTS IDENTIFICATION
Most small parts which are not marked, or whose markings
are illegible, may be identified from their locations on the
circuit board X*Ray views, or from the chassis photographs.
Reference to the Schematic will then give the value of the
part in many instances. Cross reference charts to Heath part
numbers follow (or are included on the Schematic) for
transistors, diodes, coils, and transformers. Once the part
number has been determined, refer to the "Replacement
Parts Price List."
INDUCTOR CROSS REFERENCE TABLE
COMPONENT
DESIGNATION
HEATH
PART
NO.
COMPONENT
DESIGNATION
HEATH
PART
NO.
L101
40-587
L904
40-548
L601, 602
40-689
L905
40-546
L603, 604
40-690
L941
40-1076
L605
40-693
P.E.C.
84-22
L606, 607
40-691
RFC 101
40-487
L608
40-692
RFC 201
45-51
L701
40-685
RFC 801
45-51
L702
40-686
RFC 901
45-41
L703, 704
40-687
RFC 902
45-30
L705
40-688
T1
52-79
L801
40-685
T102
52-73
L802
40-686
T103
52-79
L803, 804
40-687
T201
40-1023
L805
40-688
T202
52-65
L901, 902
45-53
T301
51-123
L903
40-549
T941
52-103
NOTES:
J005
ZR
SCHEMATIC OF THE
HEATHKIT®
SSB TRANSCEIVER
MODEL HW-101
LETTER NUMBER DESIGNATIONS FOR RESISTORS, CAPACITORS ETC . HAVE BEEN
PLACCO IN THE FOLLOWING GROUPS
0 99 PARTS ON MODULATOR CIRCUIT BOARO
100-1* IF
200 ?** BANOPiSS
300 J99 AUOIO
*00 *99 RF DRIVES
SOO S» crystal
600 699 MCTCROOYNE
OSCILLATOR
fOO 199 DRIVER GRID
SOO a 99 driver Plate
900 999 PARTS MOUNTED ON THE CHASSIS
1 All RESISTORS ARE 1 2 WATT UNLESS MARRED OTHERWISE
All RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS K '000, M 1,000,000
2 UNLESS OTHERWISE MARRED. All CAPACITOR VALUES OF l OR OVER ARE IN pF
ANO ALL VALUES LESS THAN 1 ARE IN F.
1. REFER TO THE X RAT ANO CHASSIS VIEWS FOR PHYSICAL LOCATION OF PARTS
* SEE THE VOLTAGE CHARTS ANO THf RESISTANCE CHART FOR ALL MEASUREMENTS
$. all SWITCHES ARE in the POSITION INDICATED BY THE KNOB POINTERS
6 ARROW tNOICATESCLOCFWlSE ROTATION OF ANOB VIEWED FROM KNOB E NO
’O NUMBERED COAXIAL CABLE
S. (_7D INDICATES RF VOLTAGE WITH CONTROLS SET PER FIGURE I ?1
9 ALL RELAY CONTACTS SHOWN IN TRANSMIT TUNE POSITION
MIC CW LEVEL IS A DUAL CONTROL.
1 1 FOR GREATER CLARITY. REl av SECTIONS ARE SHOWN ClOSEST TO THE CiRCUl
IN WHICH THEY ARE USED ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MARKS IS USED TO iDfNTH
THE SCPARATCO SECTION OF THE RELAYS
i? SWITCH WAFERS ARE IDENTIFIED AS in The FOLLOWING EXAMPLE
FRONT PANEL WAFER NUMBCh F FRONT SIDE OF THE WAFER
NAME OF WITH THE SWITCH R REAR SlOC OF THE WAFER.
SWITCH VIEWED FROM The
FRONT PANEL ,
* VOLTAGE s betono the RANGE or THE MEATMRlT rf probe
TRANSISTORS
COMPONENT DESIGNATION
Part of 595-1277-17
Copyright © WTO
HMth Company
AM Rrghti Reserved
DIODES
TRANSISTORS
SCHEMATIC OF THE
HEATHKIT*
S8S TRANSCEIVER
MODEL HW-101
HmVi Company
of 5#5-t277-17 m Hgtm
FOR PARTS REQUESTS ONLY
• Be sure to follow instructions carefully.
• Use a separate letter for all correspondence.
• Please allow 10-14 days for mail delivery time.
INSTRUCTIONS
• Please print all information requested.
• Be sure you list the correct HEATH part number exactly as
it appears in the parts list.
• If you wish to prepay your order, mail this card and your
payment in an envelope. Be sure to include 10% (250
minimum, $3.50 maximum) for insurance, shipping and
handling. Michigan residents add 4% tax.
Total enclosed $
• If you prefer COD shipment, check the COD box and mail
this form. COD □
The information requested in the next two lines is not required
when purchasing nonwarranty replacement parts, but it can
help us provide you with better products in the future.
FOR PARTS REQUESTS ONLY
• Be sure to follow instructions carefully.
• Use a separate letter for all correspondence.
• Please allow 10-14 days for mail delivery time.
INSTRUCTIONS
• Please print all information requested.
• Be sure you list the correct HEATH part number exactly as
it appears in the parts list.
• If you wish to prepay your order, mail this card and your
payment in an envelope. Be sure to include 10% (250
minimum, $3.50 maximum) for insurance, shipping and
handling. Michigan residents add 4% tax.
Total enclosed $
• If you prefer COD shipment, check the COD box and mail
this form. COD □
The information requested in the next two lines is not required
when purchasing nonwarranty replacement parts, but it can
help us provide you with better products in the future.
Date
Purchased
Invoice # -
Location
Purchased
LIST HEATH
PART NUMBER
TOTAL FOR PARTS
HANDLING AND SHIPPING
MICHIGAN RESIDENTS ADD 4% TAX
TOTAL AMOUNT OF ORDER
SEND TO; HEATH COMPANY
BENTON HARBOR
MICHIGAN 49022
ATTN: PARTS REPLACEMENT
Phone (Replacement parts only): 616 982-3571
Model #
Date
Purchased
Location
Purchased
LIST HEATH
PART NUMBER
TOTAL FOR PARTS
HANDLING AND SHIPPING
MICHIGAN RESIDENTS ADD 4% TAX
TOTAL AMOUNT OF ORDER
SEND TO; HEATH COMPANY
BENTON HARBOR
MICHIGAN 49022
ATTN: PARTS REPLACEMENT
Phone (Replacement parts only): 616 982-3571
THIS FORM IS FOR U S. CUSTOMERS ONLY
OVERSEAS CUSTOMERS SEE YOUR DISTRIBUTOR
THIS FORM IS FOR U.S. CUSTOMERS ONLY
OVERSEAS CUSTOMERS SEE YOUR DISTRIBUTOR
CUSTOMER SERVICE
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Please provide complete information when you request re-
placements from either the factory or Heath Electronic Cen-
ters. Be certain to include the HEATH part number exactly as it
appears in the parts list.
ORDERING FROM THE FACTORY
Print all of the information requested on the parts order form
furnished with this product and mail it to Heath. For telephone
orders (parts only) dial 616 982-3571. If you are unable to
locate an order form, write us a letter or card including:
• Heath part number.
• Model number.
• Date of purchase.
• Location purchased or invoice number.
• Nature of the defect.
• Your payment or authorization for COD shipment of parts
not covered by warranty.
Mail letters to: Heath Company
Benton Harbor
Ml 49022
Attn: Parts Replacement
Retain original parts until you receive replacements.
Parts that should be returned to the factory will be listed .
on your packing slip.
OBTAINING REPLACEMENTS FROM
HEATH ELECTRONIC CENTERS
For your convenience, “over the counter” replacement parts
are available from the Heath Electronic Centers listed in your
catalog. Be sure to bring in the original part and purchase
invoice when you request a warranty replacement from a
Heath Electronic Center.
TECHNICAL CONSULTATION
Need help with your kit? — Self-Service? — Construction? —
Operation? — Call or write for assistance, you’ll find our Tech-
nical Consultants eager to help with just about any technical
problem except “customizing" for unique applications.
The effectiveness of our consultation service depends on the
information you furnish. Be sure to tell us:
• The Model number and Series number from the blue and
white label.
• The date of purchase.
• An exact description of the difficulty.
• Everything you have done in attempting to correct the prob-
lem.
Also include switch positions, connections to other units,
operating procedures, voltage readings, and any other infor-
mation you think might be helpful.
Please do not send parts for testing, unless this is specifi-
cally requested by our Consultants.
Hints: Telephone traffic is lightest at midweek — please be
sure your Manual and notes are on hand when you call.
Heathkit Electronic Center facilities are also available for tele-
phone or “walk-in” personal assistance.
REPAIR SERVICE
Service facilities are available, if they are needed, to repair
your completed kit. (Kits that have been modified, soldered
with paste flux or acid core solder, cannot be accepted for
repair.)
If It Is convenient, personally deliver your kit to a Heathkit
Electronic Center. For warranty parts replacement, sup-
ply a copy of the Invoice or sales slip.
If you prefer to ship your kit to the factory, attach a letter
containing the following information directly to the unit:
• Your name and address.
• Date of purchase and invoice number.
• Copies of all correspondence relevant to the service of the
kit.
• A brief description of the difficulty.
• Authorization to return your kit COD for the service and
shipping charges. (This will reduce the possibility of delay.)
Check the equipment to see that all screws and parts are
secured. (Do not include any wooden cabinets or color televi-
sion picture tubes, as these are easily damaged in shipment.
Do not include the kit Manual.) Place the equipment in a strong
carton with at least THREE INCHES oUesilient packing mate-
rial (shredded paper, excelsior, etc.) on all sides. Use addi-
tional packing material where there are protrusions (control
sticks, large knobs, etc.). If the unit weighs over 15 lbs., place
this carton in another one with 3/4” of packing material bet-
ween the two.
Seal the carton with reinforced gummed tape, tie it with a
strong cord, and mark it “Fragile” on at least two sides. Re-
member, the carrier will not accept liability for shipping dam-
age if the unit is insufficiently packed. Ship by prepaid express,
United Parcel Service, or insured Parcel Post to:
Heath Company
Service Department
Benton Harbor, Michigan 49022
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11